EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide

EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
EMC® NetWorker®
Version 8.2 SP1 and later
VMware Integration Guide
302-001-580
REV 11
Copyright © 1990-2015 EMC Corporation. All rights reserved. Published in USA.
Published November, 2015
EMC believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information is subject to change
without notice.
The information in this publication is provided as is. EMC Corporation makes no representations or warranties of any kind with
respect to the information in this publication, and specifically disclaims implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a
particular purpose. Use, copying, and distribution of any EMC software described in this publication requires an applicable
software license.
EMC², EMC, and the EMC logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and other
countries. All other trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners.
For the most up-to-date regulatory document for your product line, go to EMC Online Support (https://support.emc.com).
EMC Corporation
Hopkinton, Massachusetts 01748-9103
1-508-435-1000 In North America 1-866-464-7381
www.EMC.com
2
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
CONTENTS
Figures
7
Tables
9
Preface
11
Chapter 1
Introduction
17
Introduction to VMware support.................................................................... 18
Backup and recovery types............................................................................18
Guest-based backup and recovery.................................................................20
Recommendations for NetWorker installed in a virtual machine....... 20
Advantages of guest-based backups................................................ 20
Disadvantages of guest-based backups........................................... 21
Installation for guest-based backup and recovery.............................21
Configuration of guest-based backup and recovery.......................... 21
Recommendations and considerations for guest-based backup....... 21
NetWorker VMware Protection....................................................................... 22
Advantages of NetWorker VMware Protection................................... 22
Disadvantages of NetWorker VMware Protection.............................. 22
VADP backup and recovery (legacy)...............................................................22
Advantages of VADP.........................................................................22
Disadvantages of VADP.................................................................... 23
Chapter 2
NetWorker VMware Protection
25
Introduction to NetWorker VMware Protection............................................... 26
NetWorker VMware Protection tasks.................................................26
System requirements.................................................................................... 27
Port requirements......................................................................................... 28
Install the VMware Backup appliances.......................................................... 30
Pre-installation requirements........................................................... 30
Downloading the OVAs for EMC Backup and Recovery...................... 32
Proxy assignment for backup and recovery.......................................34
Deploying the VMware Backup appliance.........................................35
Deploy external proxy appliance in vCenter...................................... 36
Upgrade the VMware Backup Appliance and vCenter........................41
Creating a dedicated vCenter user account and EMC Backup and Recovery role
..................................................................................................................... 45
Create vCenter user account.............................................................45
Create a customized role..................................................................46
vSphere Client user accounts........................................................... 49
Restrict mapping of datastores......................................................................50
EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window setup...................................... 50
Post-Installation configuration in the EMC Backup and Recovery
Configure window............................................................................ 53
Dual NIC support........................................................................................... 56
Setup and configuration requirements............................................. 56
Backing up the VMware environment using NMC........................................... 61
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
3
CONTENTS
Setting user privileges for the root user in the NetWorker server....... 61
Accessing VMware Protection in NMC...............................................61
VMware Backup Appliance in NMC................................................... 62
VMware Protection Policies in NMC.................................................. 65
VMware View in NMC........................................................................71
Starting a policy manually from the NMC Monitoring window............75
Stopping a policy from the NMC Monitoring window.........................76
Viewing policy progress from the NMC Monitoring window............... 76
Managing the VMware environment using the vSphere Web Client................ 76
Benefits of EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the vSphere
Web Client....................................................................................... 77
Deduplication store benefits............................................................ 77
Image-level Backup and Restore...................................................... 78
Connecting to the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the
vSphere Web Client..........................................................................78
Available tasks in the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface....... 80
Assigning VMs/VMDKs to a policy.................................................... 85
Manually starting the backup policy using Backup Now................... 86
Stopping a policy in the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface.... 87
Viewing policy progress in the vSphere Web Client...........................87
Restoring the VMware environment............................................................... 87
FULLVM (Image-level) Restore.......................................................... 87
File-level restore...............................................................................93
Monitoring VMware Backup Appliance activity.............................................. 97
Viewing Recent Tasks in the vSphere Web Client.............................. 97
Viewing Alarms................................................................................ 98
Viewing the Event Console............................................................... 98
Monitoring VMware Backup Appliance events from NMC.................. 99
Other options for monitoring sessions..............................................99
Shutdown and Startup Procedures.............................................................. 100
EMC Backup and Recovery Capacity Management....................................... 100
Impact of Selecting Thin or Thick Provisioned Disks....................... 100
Save set lifecycle........................................................................... 101
Checkpoints and VMware Backup appliance rollback.................................. 102
Creating a checkpoint using the EMC Backup and Recovery user
interface........................................................................................ 102
Rolling back to a checkpoint.......................................................... 102
Protecting checkpoints for the VMware Backup appliance..............103
Cross Sync.................................................................................................. 103
Decommissioning the VMware Backup Appliance....................................... 104
Disaster Recovery to the same vCenter........................................................ 105
Disaster Recovery Guidelines......................................................... 105
Preparing the VMware Backup appliance for disaster recovery....... 106
Performing a disaster recovery of the VMware Backup appliance....107
Complete disaster recovery of the VMware Backup appliance and the
Data Domain or tape device........................................................... 108
Recovery from a secondary site...................................................... 109
Best practices and troubleshooting............................................................. 110
Performance and scalability........................................................... 110
NetWorker VMware Protection best practices................................. 113
Limitations and unsupported features............................................115
Configuration checklist.................................................................. 117
Connectivity between the VMware Backup Appliance and the ESXi/
vCenter.......................................................................................... 120
Connectivity between the VMware Backup Appliance and the
NetWorker server........................................................................... 121
4
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
CONTENTS
AV-NetWorker Communicator (avnwcomm) timeout........................122
Log in to the EMC Backup and Recovery Console as admin instead of
root................................................................................................123
Unable to add VM to a policy in NMC's VMware View when you register
multiple VMware Backup Appliance's with a combination of IP and
FQDN............................................................................................. 123
Launch of EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window fails when
using Chrome or Firefox web browsers........................................... 123
Removing VMware Protection Policy when VMware Backup Appliance
is offline.........................................................................................124
Log file locations............................................................................125
NetWorker operations.................................................................... 125
vCenter server operations.............................................................. 127
vSphere Client operations.............................................................. 128
Backup operations.........................................................................131
Restore operations.........................................................................133
Adding external proxies................................................................. 134
Creating and analyzing crashes on Windows 2008 R2.................... 134
Network protection software exclusions......................................... 134
Ensure backup pool volumes mounted at all times.........................135
Missing permissions for sites with LDAP configured....................... 135
Accessing Knowledge Base Articles................................................135
Checkpoint discover timeout..........................................................135
Regenerate SSL certificates on the VMware Backup Appliance....... 136
Chapter 3
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
137
Software and hardware requirements..........................................................138
Limitations and unsupported features.........................................................139
Limitations to vCenter on non-English versions of Windows........... 139
Limitation for VADP proxy host on non-English versions of Windows
...................................................................................................... 140
Limitations to vSphere 5.5 and 6.0 support....................................140
Transport modes......................................................................................... 140
Changed Block Tracking (CBT)..................................................................... 141
Independent persistent disks are not backed up............................ 141
Configuration options..................................................................................142
Configuring the VADP proxy host and Hypervisor resource........................... 142
Configuring a VADP proxy host and Hypervisor resource automatically
by using the Client Backup Configuration Wizard............................142
Configuring a VADP proxy host and Hypervisor resource manually by
using nsradmin.............................................................................. 144
Configuring a virtual client for backup......................................................... 149
Configuring a virtual client by using the Client Backup Configuration
wizard............................................................................................150
Configuring a virtual client manually by using the Client Properties
window.......................................................................................... 152
Creating a VADP User role in vCenter........................................................... 153
Creating a VADP Proxy role............................................................. 153
Assigning the VADP User role to the user specified in the NetWorker
Hypervisor resource....................................................................... 154
Minimum vCenter permissions needed to back up and recover using
VADP..............................................................................................154
Configuring Changed Block Tracking (CBT).................................................. 157
Configuring CBT using the variable VADP_DISABLE_CBT................. 157
Configuring CBT using the nsrvadp_modify_vm command..............157
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
5
CONTENTS
Enabling CBT using the vSphere Client GUI.....................................158
Monitor VMs................................................................................................158
Launching the vSphere Web Client from the NetWorker Console (Windows only)
................................................................................................................... 158
Recovering VADP Backups...........................................................................158
File based recovery of a VM............................................................ 159
Image level (single step) recovery of a full VM................................ 160
Recovery of pre-NetWorker 7.6 SP2 VM backups............................ 168
VADP Planning and Best Practices............................................................... 168
Recommendations and considerations for VADP backup and recovery
...................................................................................................... 168
Application-level consistent backups............................................. 169
Selection of physical vs. virtual proxy.............................................171
VADP snapshot recommendations................................................. 172
Recommendations for Data Domain systems..................................175
Network and Firewall port requirements......................................... 175
Memory requirements for the VADP proxy.......................................176
VADP mount point recommendations and space considerations.... 177
Support for tape drives in a VM...................................................... 178
Recommendations and considerations for transport modes........... 179
Performance optimization recommendations................................. 182
VADP proxy access to LUNs............................................................ 183
Upgrading from VCB to VADP (pre-NetWorker 8.1)....................................... 184
Upgrading an existing NetWorker server and VCB proxy..................184
Change vCenter role privileges after upgrading...............................186
Upgrading only the proxy client to NetWorker 7.6 SP2 or later........ 187
Upgrade to use vCenter if ESX/ESXi server was previously used for VM
backups.........................................................................................188
Space requirement changes on proxy for VADP vs VCB................... 188
Post-upgrading steps for Virtual Center on a 64-bit Windows host..188
Chapter 4
Licensing
191
Virtual environments simplified licensing....................................................192
Physical ESX hosts in non-VADP configurations........................................... 192
Guest-based licensing.................................................................................192
NetWorker VMware Protection licensing...................................................... 193
VADP licensing............................................................................................ 193
Using existing licenses to support VADP after upgrading................ 193
Glossary
6
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
195
FIGURES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Selecting the OVA to deploy in vCenter/vSphere Web Client.......................................... 35
EMC Backup and Recovery registration ......................................................................... 36
Registering proxy with the VMware Backup appliance....................................................39
Unlock the vCenter Registration in the EMC Backup and Recovery Configuration Utility
......................................................................................................................................41
Upgrading order for NetWorker components when upgrading the VMware Backup
appliance...................................................................................................................... 43
Take Snapshot in vSphere Client....................................................................................44
Connect to ISO in vSphere Client....................................................................................44
Hosts and Clusters in the vSphere Web Client................................................................49
EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window’s Welcome page...................................... 51
EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window during registration................................... 52
EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window after registration......................................53
Collecting log files in the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window......................... 55
Backup and production network traffic.......................................................................... 57
Swap network for NICs in the Virtual Machine Properties window...................................58
Configuration tab in the NMC Administration window.................................................... 62
VMware Backup Appliance health monitoring in NMC.................................................... 62
NSR VBA Server Properties window................................................................................ 63
Default VMware Protection policy in NMC.......................................................................65
Create new policy in NMC.............................................................................................. 66
Create VMware policy window........................................................................................66
Create VMware Action window....................................................................................... 67
Select a VMware Backup Appliance in the Create/Edit VMware Protection Policy window
......................................................................................................................................69
VMware Protection policy with associated actions......................................................... 70
Enable and mark actions concurrent in Create VMware Policy window........................... 70
Map view of VMware environment in NMC......................................................................72
Cluster with child elements in VMware View.................................................................. 72
Filtering results in VMware View.....................................................................................73
Select Table view in VMware View..................................................................................74
Add policy in VMware View............................................................................................ 75
Selecting the Backup Appliance.....................................................................................79
EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the vSphere Web Client.............................. 80
Backup policies in the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface....................................81
Viewing the log on the Configuration tab........................................................................84
Selecting VMs in EMC Backup and Recovery user interface............................................ 86
Selecting at VMDK level in EMC Backup and Recovery user interface..............................86
Viewing policy progress in the Task Console.................................................................. 87
Restore tab in EMC Backup and Recovery user interface.................................................88
Set Instant Access Options in the Restore a backup wizard............................................ 90
Emergency Restore in the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window........................ 91
EMC Data Protection Restore Client login page...............................................................94
Manage Mounted Backups in EMC Data Protection Restore Client..................................94
Browse and select files to recover..................................................................................95
Select Destination window.............................................................................................95
vSphere PowerCLI example output...............................................................................100
Run Integrity Check button in EMC Backup and Recovery user interface....................... 102
Roll back in EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window........................................... 103
Start VBA Recover for Checkpoints in NMC................................................................... 108
Recovery from a secondary site in the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface.......... 110
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
7
FIGURES
49
50
51
52
53
8
Monitoring stream counts output.................................................................................118
Specify Client name and type.......................................................................................143
Apps and Modules tab in NMC.....................................................................................148
Recover Options dialog................................................................................................159
VMware vCenter restore............................................................................................... 163
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
TABLES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Revision history............................................................................................................. 11
Comparing Guest based, VADP, and NetWorker VMware Protection................................18
NetWorker VMware Data Protection tasks...................................................................... 26
NetWorker VMware Protection requirements.................................................................. 27
Incoming port requirements...........................................................................................28
Outgoing port requirements — with external proxies...................................................... 29
Recommended memory and swap space based on storage space utilization................. 33
OVA versions for NetWorker 8.2 SP2 VMware Backup Appliances.................................. 33
OVA versions for NetWorker 8.2 SP1 VMware Backup Appliances.................................. 34
Minimum required vCenter user account privileges ....................................................... 46
Description of services running on the VMware Backup appliance................................. 53
Backup tab column descriptions ...................................................................................80
Email configuration fields ............................................................................................. 83
EMC Backup and Recovery alarms .................................................................................98
Scalability Factors....................................................................................................... 110
Maximum concurrent sessions per VMware Backup Appliance.................................... 111
Concurrency/parallelism recommendations ................................................................112
Application information values ................................................................................... 145
Recovery options that are available based on the virtual client configuration...............149
VADP backup privileges .............................................................................................. 154
VADP recovery privileges .............................................................................................155
Maximum virtual disk file size and corresponding block size for ESX/ESXi 4.0............. 174
Maximum virtual disk size and corresponding block size for ESX/ESXi 4.1...................174
APPINFO variable replacements................................................................................... 186
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
9
TABLES
10
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
Preface
As part of an effort to improve its product lines, EMC periodically releases revisions of its
software and hardware. Therefore, some functions described in this document might not
be supported by all versions of the software or hardware currently in use. The product
release notes provide the most up-to-date information on product features.
Contact your EMC technical support professional if a product does not function properly
or does not function as described in this document.
Note
This document was accurate at publication time. Go to EMC Online Support (https://
support.emc.com) to ensure that you are using the latest version of this document.
Purpose
This document describes the integration of VMware with NetWorker.
Audience
This guide is part of the NetWorker documentation set, and is intended for use by system
administrators who are responsible for setting up and maintaining backups on a network.
Operators who monitor daily backups will also find this guide useful.
Revision history
The following table presents the revision history of this document.
Table 1 Revision history
Revision
Date
Description
01
January 28, 2015
First release of this document for EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1
02
March 20, 2015
Added topic AV-NW Communicator (avnwcomm)
timeout on page 122 to the "Troubleshooting" section
03
April 3, 2015
Added topics to Troubleshooting on page 110
Revised Best Practices on page 113
Revised Limitations and unsupported features on page
115
Added OVA files for the NetWorker 8.2 SP1 VMware
Backup Appliances on page 34
Added note indicating NetWorker does not support
vSphere 6. Note that vSphere 6 is now supported with
OVA 1.1.1.50.
Added note to FLR limitations on page 96indicating that
FLR of GPT file systems is supported only with external
proxies
04
April 27, 2015
Further revisions to Troubleshooting on page 110
Further revisions to Best Practices on page 113
Further revisions to Limitations and unsupported
features on page 115
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
11
Preface
Table 1 Revision history (continued)
Revision
Date
Description
05
May 4, 2015
Revised Best Practices on page 113 for upgrading
components and ensuring NetWorker server, storage node
and VMware Backup Appliance are at the same version
Revised System Requirements on page 27
Revised Port Requirements on page 28
06
May 25, 2015
Added information about the new OVA version 1.1.1.50 of
the VMware Backup Appliances
Added knowledgebase article information to Limitations
and unsupported features on page 115
Created a new topic for VMware Backup Appliances best
practices on page 30
Updates to System Requirements on page 27 for new
OVA file versions, vSphere 6.0 support, and DD Boost
Compatibility Guide references
Updates to NTP configuration on page 32 to address the
leap second issue
12
07
June 3, 2015
Added more detailed information on Emergency Restore,
including step-by-step procedure, best practices, and
limitations, to Direct-to-host recovery (Emergency
Restore) on page 91
08
June 12, 2015
Updated OVA references throughout to indicate that OVA
version 1.1.1.50 is the latest version for NetWorker 8.2
SP1
09
September 30,
2015
Updated for the release of NetWorker 8.2 SP2. Updates
include:
l
Added section Launch of EMC Backup and Recovery
Configure window fails when using Chrome or Firefox
web browsers on page 123
l
Added section After ESX upgrade to 6.0, EMC Backup
and Recovery plug-in missing from vSphere Web
Client on page 128
l
Revised section Limitations to vSphere 5.5 and 6.0
support on page 140 for VADP non-support of TLS in
vSphere 6.0
l
Added section Upgrade the vCenter server
software on page 41
l
Added section OVA files for the NetWorker 8.2 SP2
VMware Backup Appliances on page 33
10
October 23, 2015
Added section Removing VMware Protection Policy when
VMware Backup Appliance is offline on page 124
11
November 30,
2015
Added troubleshooting section Unable to add VM to a
policy in NMC’s VMware View when you register multiple
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
Preface
Table 1 Revision history (continued)
Revision
Date
Description
VMware Backup Appliance’s with a combination of IP and
FQDN on page 123
Added note to indicate disabling Backup Now
functionality in NMC does not disable adhoc backups for
individual VMs in the vSphere Web Client
Added note to indicate that you may need to perform
cross sync manually when you perform a disaster recovery
after upgrading from a NetWorker 8.2 SP1 VMware
Backup appliance to a NetWorker 8.2 SP2 version
Updated emergency restore limitations to indicate that
the restore must be performed from a primary backup and
not a cloned backup
Clarified that NetWorker VMware Protection backup does
not support independent (persistent and non-persistent)
disks.
Added section Restore to new virtual machine not
available for backups that included physical RDM
disks on page 133
Removed information about how to configure VMware
notifications from the VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
chapter.
Related documentation
The NetWorker documentation set includes the following publications:
l
EMC NetWorker Online Software Compatibility Guide
Provides a list of client, server, and storage node operating systems supported by the
EMC information protection software versions. You can access the Online Software
Compatibility Guide on the EMC Online Support site at https://support.emc.com.
From the Support by Product pages, search for NetWorker using "Find a Product", and
then select the Install, License, and Configure link.
l
EMC NetWorker Administration Guide
Describes how to configure and maintain the NetWorker software.
l
EMC NetWorker Cluster Installation Guide
Contains information related to configuring NetWorker software on cluster servers
and clients.
l
EMC NetWorker Installation Guide
Provides information on how to install, uninstall and update the NetWorker software
for clients, storage nodes, and servers on all supported operating systems.
l
EMC NetWorker Updating from a Previous Release Guide
Describes how to update the NetWorker software from a previously installed release.
l
EMC NetWorker Release Notes
Contains information on new features and changes, fixed problems, known
limitations, environment and system requirements for the latest NetWorker software
release.
l
EMC NetWorker Avamar Devices Integration Guide
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
13
Preface
Provides planning and configuration information on the use of Avamar devices in a
NetWorker environment.
l
EMC NetWorker Command Reference Guide
Provides reference information for NetWorker commands and options.
l
EMC NetWorker Data Domain Deduplication Devices Integration Guide
Provides planning and configuration information on the use of Data Domain devices
for data deduplication backup and storage in a NetWorker environment.
l
EMC NetWorker Error Message Guide
Provides information on common NetWorker error messages.
l
EMC NetWorker Licensing Guide
Provides information about licensing NetWorker products and features.
l
EMC NetWorker Management Console Online Help
Describes the day-to-day administration tasks performed in the NetWorker
Management Console and the NetWorker Administration window. To view Help, click
Help in the main menu.
l
EMC NetWorker User Online Help
The NetWorker User program is the Windows client interface. Describes how to use
the NetWorker User program which is the Windows client interface connect to a
NetWorker server to back up, recover, archive, and retrieve files over a network.
Special notice conventions used in this document
EMC uses the following conventions for special notices:
NOTICE
Addresses practices not related to personal injury.
Note
Presents information that is important, but not hazard-related.
Typographical conventions
EMC uses the following type style conventions in this document:
Italic
Use for full titles of publications referenced in text
Monospace
Use for:
l
System code
l
System output, such as an error message or script
l
Pathnames, file names, prompts, and syntax
l
Commands and options
Monospace italic
Use for variables
Monospace bold
Use for user input
[]
Square brackets enclose optional values
|
Vertical bar indicates alternate selections - the bar means “or”
{}
Braces enclose content that the user must specify, such as x or y or z
...
Ellipses indicate non-essential information omitted from the example
Where to get help
EMC support, product, and licensing information can be obtained as follows:
14
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
Preface
Product information
For documentation, release notes, software updates, or information about EMC products,
go to EMC Online Support at https://support.emc.com.
Technical support
Go to EMC Online Support and click Service Center. You will see several options for
contacting EMC Technical Support. Note that to open a service request, you must have a
valid support agreement. Contact your EMC sales representative for details about
obtaining a valid support agreement or with questions about your account.
Online communities
Visit EMC Community Network at https://community.emc.com for peer contacts,
conversations, and content on product support and solutions. Interactively engage online
with customers, partners, and certified professionals for all EMC products.
Your comments
Your suggestions will help us continue to improve the accuracy, organization, and overall
quality of the user publications. Send your opinions of this document to
DPAD.Doc.Feedback@emc.com
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
15
Preface
16
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
This chapter contains the following topics:
l
l
l
l
l
Introduction to VMware support............................................................................ 18
Backup and recovery types....................................................................................18
Guest-based backup and recovery.........................................................................20
NetWorker VMware Protection............................................................................... 22
VADP backup and recovery (legacy).......................................................................22
Introduction
17
Introduction
Introduction to VMware support
The NetWorker software provides support for three types of backup and recovery
solutions for VMware virtual clients. Within each of the following solutions, you can use a
NetWorker server residing on a host external to the vSphere server, or you can configure a
NetWorker server on a guest host within the vSphere server:
l
Guest-based backup and recovery — This option requires you to install a NetWorker
client within each virtual machine host. This is a popular way to protect VMs due to
the same workflow implemented for a physical machine. This means backup
configurations and recovery options follow traditional methods that administrators
are already familiar with. There are no added configuration requirements however,
there is a load consideration on the physical servers and resources, and the
requirement of maintaining NetWorker on each guest.
l
NetWorker VMware Protection — A NetWorker-integrated VMware backup and
monitoring solution first introduced in NetWorker 8.1. In this solution, when you
deploy a VMware Backup Appliance in the vSphere server and register the appliance
with NetWorker and vCenter, you can create backup and cloning policies for the
VMware Backup Appliance, and assign to VMs/VMDKs to policies in NMC. Also, the
EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the vSphere Web Client provides
management options. After running the policy, you can then perform image-level
recoveries from the vSphere Web Client, or file-level recoveries from the EMC Data
Protection Restore Client interface.
l
VADP (legacy) — Uses vStorage APIs for Data Protection (VADP) technology to offload
backup processing from the NetWorker server to a separate backup proxy host. This
option also provides notifications when the environment changes. With this option,
you can avoid the challenges associated with resource utilization on the server
because the proxy host inherits the workload. Also, VADP requires less maintenance
than Guest-based backup and recovery because it does not require installation of the
NetWorker client on each guest, however, this option is more complex to configure
and requires additional hardware and infrastructure.
Backup and recovery types
The following table provides a quick comparison between Guest-based, VADP, and
NetWorker VMware Protection backup and recovery.
Table 2 Comparing Guest based, VADP, and NetWorker VMware Protection
Option
Guest-based
Recommend for
l
l
VMDK level
backups
18
Applicationconsistent
backups.
Shared storage
not available
No
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP (legacy)
NetWorker VMware
Protection
l
LAN free backups
l
LAN free backups
l
Disaster recovery
l
Disaster recovery
l
Shared storage
environments
l
Shared storage
environments
l
Direct backup to tape
l
Forever incrementals
Yes
Yes
Introduction
Table 2 Comparing Guest based, VADP, and NetWorker VMware Protection (continued)
Option
Guest-based
VADP (legacy)
Individual file
backups
Yes
Yes for Windows guest OS Not required
only
Incremental
File level
File level
Block level, leverages CBT
CBT
Not supported
File level
Block level
Virtual full backup Not supported
Not supported
Backup is always virtual
full
File level restore
Yes
Yes for Windows guest OS Yes for Windows and Linux
only
Deduplication
supported
Yes
Yes — Direct backup to
Data Domain
Yes — Direct backup to
EMC Backup and Recovery
appliance internal storage
or to a Data Domain
appliance. Leverages
source as well as targetlevel Deduplication
Impact on virtual
machine
High
Low
Low
Impact on ESX/
ESXi server
High
Medium, if snapshots
performed for multiple
VMs on same ESX/
Datastore
Medium depending on
number of snapshots on
VMs of the same ESX
Backup
performance
Slower
Faster - dependent on
resources on proxy and
whether FLR required
Faster
Additional
hardware
requirements
No
Uses a physical or virtual
proxy, depending on the
implementation
Uses internal or external
proxies. Each EMC Backup
and Recovery appliance
and external proxy has 8
internal proxies
embedded.
Proxy
Not applicable
Physical (for san backup),
virtual (hotadd)
Virtual (hotadd)
vCenter autodiscovery
Not applicable
Supported
Not supported
Configuration
NetWorker client
configured through
Client Configuration
wizard
Proxy and virtual machine
as NetWorker client
configured through Client
Configuration wizard
EMC Backup and Recovery
appliance registration
through web interface
Configure VM as a Yes
NetWorker client?
Yes
No
Transport mode
supported
hotadd|san|nbd|nbdssl
hotadd (default),
nbd(fallback)
Not applicable
NetWorker VMware
Protection
Backup and recovery types
19
Introduction
Table 2 Comparing Guest based, VADP, and NetWorker VMware Protection (continued)
Guest-based backup and recovery
Guest-based backup and recovery operations provide a simple and familiar
implementation. Traditionally, most physical machine backup and recovery operations
have been performed this way, which makes the transition to virtual machine backups
using this technology a straightforward task. Regardless of the virtualization technologies
involved, VMs are complete OS installations hosted on virtualized hardware. You can
protect VMs by using the same basic techniques as their physical counterparts, that is,
running a NetWorker client inside the virtual machine. The same OS support rules apply
to a physical and virtual machine.
Recommendations for NetWorker installed in a virtual machine
Before you install the NetWorker software on VMs, consider the following
recommendations:
l
If not using a host outside of ESX as the NetWorker server, provide more CPU
reservation and shares for the VM that hosts the NetWorker Server.
l
Provide more memory reservation for the VM that hosts the NetWorker Storage Node.
l
Set a high restart priority for the VMs that host the NetWorker Server and Storage
Node.
l
Connect the VMs that host the NetWorker Server, NetWorker Clients and NetWorker
Storage Node to the same virtual switch.
l
Leverage the guest-based deduplication for NetWorker clients.
l
Do not start backups for all VM clients at the same time; stagger the backups to
reduce the impact on the ESX/ESXi server.
Advantages of guest-based backups
Guest-based backups provide the following advantages:
20
l
Supports database and application backups. The configuration is as simple as
installing and configuring the appropriate NetWorker database or application module
on the guest host.
l
Supports single file backup and restore.
l
The NetWorker server and client file index correctly references all protected data to
the originating virtual machine.
l
Supports the restore of individual files directly to the VM.
l
Easy to configure Incremental backups.
l
Supports advanced VMware features and configurations, like Distributed Resource
Scheduling (DRS) and VMotion, with no impact on the performance of NetWorker.
l
Supports host-based source deduplication is available.
l
Supports all NetWorker directives.
l
Easy to perform recovery; the recovery process is exactly the same as when you
recover files to a physical host, and allows individual users to perform their own
recoveries.
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
Introduction
Disadvantages of guest-based backups
Disadvantages of guest-based backups include:
l
No support for image level backup and recovery. Image level backup and recovery is
mostly used to support disaster recovery.
l
The backup processing load on one virtual machine will negatively impact system
resources available to all VMs hosted on the same physical ESX server, even when
using source-based deduplication.
l
Resource-intensive backups often place a heavy load on shared network and CPU
resources.
l
Client software installed on each virtual machine needs to be maintained and
updated.
l
The virtual machine must be powered on for backup processing to occur.
l
No support for Bare Metal Recovery (BMR).
Installation for guest-based backup and recovery
From an installation perspective, guest-based backup and recovery is the most
straightforward. Install the NetWorker client software on the virtual machine. The
installation procedure for a virtual machine is the same as it would be for the operating
system hosted on a physical machine.
Configuration of guest-based backup and recovery
For standard file system backups, the client configuration in the virtual machine is the
same configuration procedure as for a physical machine.
Recommendations and considerations for guest-based backup
Guest-based backup activities on a single virtual machine can create a significant load on
the parent ESX Server and, therefore, indirectly impact every other virtual machine hosted
on the ESX Server. Configure backup schedules to limit the number of simultaneous
backup jobs that run on each physical ESX Server. For example, you can use NetWorker
backup groups to back up a selection of VMs across multiple ESX servers in order to
minimize the impact on individual ESX servers at different times and maximize the
throughput of the backup.
NetWorker includes technology you can use to minimize or eliminate full backups. When
you perform only incremental backups, NetWorker copies only the data that has changed
since the previous backup to the storage node. This significantly decreases the I/O
associated with backups and the amount of backup network traffic. Also, you can
leverage guest-based deduplication to minimize the impact on the ESX servers shared
resources by eliminating CPU and memory contention.
This backup technique is very effective for database and application backups.
Configuring a database or application backup in a VM is essentially the same as
configuring the same database and application backup on a physical machine. This
technique simplifies and enhances database and application backups, often providing
incremental capabilities and restores directly to the VM. Guest-based database
deduplication is also supported for databases to help minimize impact on an ESX servers
resources.
Disadvantages of guest-based backups
21
Introduction
NetWorker VMware Protection
The NetWorker VMware Protection solution provides a VMware Backup appliance that,
when deployed and configured, allows you to set up backup and cloning policies, and
then assign VMs/VMDKs to those policies. This solution makes use of multiple
applications, including NMC, the vSphere Web Client, and the EMC Data Protection
Restore Client.
Advantages of NetWorker VMware Protection
NetWorker VMware Protection provides the following advantages:
l
Supports forever incrementals.
l
Uses existing AVE technology.
l
Supports file-level recovery directly into the VM on Linux and Windows.
l
Uses advanced FLR to perform file-level recovery from other VMs to a VM.
Disadvantages of NetWorker VMware Protection
Disadvantages of NetWorker VMware Protection include:
l
No support for upgrading from the VMware VDP solution to the NetWorker VMware
Protection solution.
l
The EMC Backup and Recovery appliance/VMware Backup Appliance cannot co-exist
with VMware VDP or any third-party backup plug-in in the same vCenter.
VADP backup and recovery (legacy)
NetWorker provides an alternate client backup technology for VMs in conjunction with
VADP technology from VMware.
With VADP, you can perform backups from a VADP backup proxy server, which can be a
physical or virtual machine, using the VMware snapshot technique (a point-in-time copy
of the VM). You can use VADP with a vCenter Server.
Advantages of VADP
VADP provides the following advantages:
22
l
Offloads backup processes from the ESX server to a VADP proxy server.
l
Eliminates the need for a backup window by using VMware virtual machine snapshot
technology.
l
Supports backups of all files residing in VMs running a Microsoft Windows guest
operating system using save set ALLVMFS.
l
Supports backups of specific files or folders for VMs running a Microsoft Windows
guest operating system.
l
Supports incremental and non level-0 backups for VMs running on a Microsoft
Windows guest operating system.
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
Introduction
Note
The incremental and non level-0 backups allow recovery of files. Recovery of the full
VM is only supported for level-0 *FULL* save set backups.
l
Supports image level backups for VMs running any guest operating system supported
by VMware.
l
Supports the ability to recover individual files from an image level backup (Windows
NTFS only).
l
Supports deduplication across VMs and servers.
l
Minimizes the backup impact on the target VM and other VMs hosted on the same
ESX server.
l
There is no need to install NetWorker software on each virtual machine.
l
Provides LAN-Free backup because the VADP proxy server can be connected to the
SAN through a fibre channel adapter.
l
Supports advanced VMware features and configurations such as Distributed
Resource Scheduling (DRS) and VMotion, which do not impact the performance of
NetWorker.
Disadvantages of VADP
Disadvantages of VADP include:
l
No support for File-level restore from Image-level backup of non-NTFS system.
l
No support for Image-level recovery of an entire VM from an incremental CBT backup.
Disadvantages of VADP
23
Introduction
24
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
CHAPTER 2
NetWorker VMware Protection
This chapter contains the following topics:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Introduction to NetWorker VMware Protection....................................................... 26
System requirements............................................................................................ 27
Port requirements................................................................................................. 28
Install the VMware Backup appliances.................................................................. 30
Creating a dedicated vCenter user account and EMC Backup and Recovery role.....45
Restrict mapping of datastores..............................................................................50
EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window setup.............................................. 50
Dual NIC support................................................................................................... 56
Backing up the VMware environment using NMC................................................... 61
Managing the VMware environment using the vSphere Web Client........................ 76
Restoring the VMware environment....................................................................... 87
Monitoring VMware Backup Appliance activity...................................................... 97
Shutdown and Startup Procedures...................................................................... 100
EMC Backup and Recovery Capacity Management............................................... 100
Checkpoints and VMware Backup appliance rollback.......................................... 102
Cross Sync.......................................................................................................... 103
Decommissioning the VMware Backup Appliance................................................104
Disaster Recovery to the same vCenter................................................................ 105
Best practices and troubleshooting..................................................................... 110
NetWorker VMware Protection
25
NetWorker VMware Protection
Introduction to NetWorker VMware Protection
NetWorker VMware Protection is a NetWorker-integrated VMware backup, monitoring and
recovery solution available in NetWorker releases 8.1 and later. This solution allows you
to create backup and cloning policies for a VMware Backup appliance using NMC, and
then assign those policies to Datacenters, Clusters, VMs and VMDKs.
This solution becomes available when you deploy the VMware Backup appliance in the
vSphere server and register the appliance with NetWorker and vCenter. After running
policy backups, you can then perform full recoveries of these backups from the vSphere
Web Client, or file-level recoveries from the EMC Data Protection Restore Client user
interface.
EMC strongly recommends upgrading the NetWorker server, storage node, and VMware
Backup Appliance to the latest NetWorker 8.2 release to use the NetWorker VMware
Protection solution. Currently, this is NetWorker 8.2 SP2 with OVA 1.1.2.6 for the VMware
Backup Appliance.
NetWorker VMware Protection tasks
The following table compares tasks in NMC with tasks in the vSphere Web Client and the
EMC Data Protection Restore client.
Table 3 NetWorker VMware Data Protection tasks
Program/Role
Task
NMC
l
Create and edit Data Protection policies to perform actions such as
backup, clone, and checkpoint backup for disaster recovery
l
Assign a policy to the VMware Backup Appliance
l
Assign VMs/VMDKs to the policy
l
Start or schedule a policy to run any backup and clone actions
associated with the policy
When you start a policy from NMC, you can perform both backups and
clones, based on the actions defined in the policy.
l
Assign VMs/VMDKs to the policy created in NMC.
l
Start an adhoc backup (Backup Now), which runs the entire policy
(backup and clone actions associated with the policy)
l
Restore a full VM backup
l
Restore a VMDK backup
l
Instant restore from a Data Domain system
Supports only Windows platforms and requires Adobe Flash Player
version 11.5.
l
Perform file-level restores
Supports both Windows and Linux platforms; Linux platforms require
Adobe Flash Player version 11.2.
EMC Backup and
Recovery user
interface in the
VMware vSphere
Web Client
EMC Data
Protection Restore
Client
26
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
System requirements
The following table lists the required components for NetWorker VMware Protection.
When you install or upgrade NetWorker and deploy the VMware Backup Appliance,
ensure that the NetWorker server, storage node, and VMware Backup Appliance are at the
same version. For example, for NetWorker 8.2 SP2, install or upgrade to the latest OVA
version 1.1.2.6. The section OVA files for the NetWorker 8.2 SP2 VMware Backup
Appliance on page 33 provides more information about the current OVA versions.
Note
The VMware Backup appliance is available in 2 capacities — a 0.5 TB and 4 TB OVA. You
only need to download one of these appliances, based on your system requirements. The
section Downloading the OVAs for EMC Backup and Recovery on page 32 provides more
information.
Table 4 NetWorker VMware Protection requirements
Component
Requirements
NetWorker
l
8.2 or later Server software with NMC
NetWorker VMware Protection only supports the following NetWorker server
architectures:
-Windows 64-bit
-Linux x86_64
-Solaris SPARC 64-bit (VMware View in NMC is not supported on Solaris)
l
CPU: 4 * 2 GHz
l
Memory: 8GB
l
Disks: 3* 250 GB
l
Backup storage capacity: 0.5 TB
l
OS: 250 GB
l
CPU: 4 * 2 GHz
l
Memory: Refer to Table 7 on page 33
l
Disks: 6 * 1 TB
l
Backup storage capacity: 4 TB
l
OS: 250 GB
l
CPU: 4 * 2 GHz
l
Memory: 4 GB
l
Disks: 2 disks (16 GB and 1 GB)
l
Version 5.5 and later
l
Linux or Windows platform, or VC appliance
l
vSphere Web Client (the VMware website provides information for supported
web browsers)
VMware
Backup
appliance (0.5
TB OVA)
VMware
Backup
appliance (4
TB OVA)
Proxy
Appliance
vCenter server
System requirements
27
NetWorker VMware Protection
Table 4 NetWorker VMware Protection requirements (continued)
Component
Requirements
Note
vSphere 6.0 is only supported with VMware Backup Appliance OVA versions
1.1.1.50 and later.
In order to access the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the
vSphere Web Client, you must enable web browsers with Adobe Flash Player
version 11.5 or later on Windows platforms. Since Linux platforms only
support up to Adobe Flash Player version 11.2, only Windows platforms can
access the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface.
VMware
Hardware
ESX/ESXi
server
Data Domain
l
Version 7 and later
l
Version 5.1 and later
l
Changed Block Tracking (CBT) enabled. If you enable CBT on ESXi version
6.0.x, refer to the VMware knowledgebase article at http://kb.vmware.com/
selfservice/microsites/search.do?
language=en_US&cmd=displayKC&externalId=2136854
l
Data Domain Boost OS at DDOS 5.4.2.1 and later, up to version 5.6.x.
Note
The EMC Data Domain Boost Compatibility Guide, available at http://
support.emc.com, provides detailed information on NetWorker and DD
Boost version compatibility.
l
DDBoost user requires administrator privileges
Port requirements
The NetWorker VMware Protection solution requires the ports outlined in the following
tables.
Table 5 Incoming port requirements
28
From
To
Port
Purpose
Data Domain
VMware Backup
Appliance
161
SNMP traps
NetWorker server
VMware Backup
Appliance
8543
NetWorker VMware Protection
web service calls to initiate
and monitor backups
NetWorker server
VMware Backup
Appliance
7937-9936
(RPC)
Checkpoint backups
EMC Data Protection
Restore Client interface
VMware Backup
Appliance
8543
File-level recovery (FLR)
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Table 5 Incoming port requirements (continued)
From
To
Port
Purpose
EMC Backup and
Recovery Configuration
Utility
VMware Backup
Appliance
8543
VMware Backup Appliance
configuration
vCenter
VMware Backup
Appliance
8543
EMC Backup and Recovery
user interface in the vSphere
Web Client
Table 6 Outgoing port requirements — with external proxies
From
To
Port
Purpose
VMware Backup
Appliance
DNS
53
Name resolution
VMware Backup
Appliance
NetWorker server 8080
Initiate operations in
NetWorker
VMware Backup
NetWorker server 7937-9936 (RPC)
Appliance and external
proxy
NetWorker client
communications
VMware Backup
Data Domain
Appliance and external
proxy
7, 22, 80, 111, 131,
163, 2049, 2052
Data Domain management
VMware Backup
Appliance
7444
Auth to SSO
VMware Backup
vCenter
Appliance and external
proxy
443
vCenter integration
VMware Backup
ESX servers
Appliance and External
Proxy
443, 111, 902
Backup and recovery
operations
VMware Backup
Appliance
External proxy
28002-28009 (preNetWorker 8.2). 28009
(NetWorker 8.2 and
later)
MCS to proxy
communications
External proxy
VMware Backup
Appliance
28001, 27000, 29000
External proxy to MCS and
GSAN
VMware SSO
To communicate with the VMware Backup Appliance, the NetWorker server VM web
services (nsrvmwsd) listen on port 8080 by default. Ensure that no other services, such
as HBA, use port 8080. To check port usage for 8080 outside of NetWorker:
l
On Windows, run netstat -anbo | findstr 8080
l
On Linux, run netstat -anp | grep 8080
l
On Solaris, run lsof -i :8080
Port requirements
29
NetWorker VMware Protection
If any software other than NetWorker listens on this port, you can change the NetWorker
web services port in NMC. To change the port, right-click the server in the Server window
and select Properties. The VMWS port field is located under the Miscellaneous tab.
Install the VMware Backup appliances
To make use of all features of the NetWorker VMware Protection solution, you must install
a VMware Backup Appliance. This section describes how to download and deploy the
VMware Backup appliance and external proxies in order to use the NetWorker VMware
Protection solution. This section also provides instructions for upgrading the VMware
Backup Appliance.
l
Pre-installation requirements on page 30
l
Downloading the OVAs for EMC Backup and Recovery on page 32
l
Proxy assignment for backup and recovery on page 34
l
Deploying the VMware Backup appliance on page 35
l
Deploy external proxy appliance in vCenter on page 36
l
Upgrading the VMware Backup Appliance on page 41
Pre-installation requirements
Before you deploy the VMware Backup Appliance, review the pre-installation
requirements in this section.
VMware Backup Appliances best practices
Review the following best practices specific to VMware Backup Appliances to ensure
successful deployment before you download and install the VMware Backup Appliance
and external proxy appliance.
l
l
Ensure that the NetWorker server, storage node, and VMware Backup Appliance are
at the same version.
When you upgrade NetWorker and the VMware Backup Appliance, upgrade in the
following order and ensure that each component is at the same version:
n
NetWorker server
n
NetWorker storage node
n
VMware Backup Appliance along with external proxies
Ensure that the DDOS version is compatible with the NetWorker server and VMware
Backup Appliance version. Compatibility of the VMware Backup Appliance for
NetWorker with DDOS support is as follows:
n
NetWorker 8.1.2 VMware Backup Appliance requires DDOS 5.4. DDOS 5.5 is not
supported.
n
NetWorker 8.2.0 VMware Backup Appliance supports DDOS 5.4 or DDOS 5.5
n
NetWorker 8.2.1 VMware Backup Appliance supports DDOS 5.4 or DDOS 5.5
n
NetWorker 8.2.2 VMware Backup Appliance supports DDOS 5.5
The EMC Data Domain Boost Compatibility Guide, available at http://
support.emc.com, provides detailed information on NetWorker and DD Boost version
compatibility.
30
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
l
You must provide an unused IP for the VMware Backup Appliance server so that it
does not conflict with the IP for another VM in the environment, even if these hosts
are not physically connected.
l
For registration of the VMware Backup Appliance with vCenter, consider using a
Service account.
l
Deploy the VMware Backup Appliance on shared VMFS5 or higher to avoid block size
limitations.
l
Backups to a Data Domain system occur faster than backups to VMware Backup
Appliance internal storage. To determine whether to use the 0.5 TB or the 4 TB
VMware Backup Appliance:
n
If using a Data Domain system, select the 0.5 TB OVA.
n
If not using Data Domain system, select the 4 TB OVA.
EMC does not recommend using a mixed environment of Data Domain and
VMware Backup appliance internal storage.
l
For better performance, EMC recommends using a dedicated datastore for the
VMware Backup appliance, especially for backups and recoveries performed from
internal storage of the appliance.
l
Keep the default values for annotations for the VMware Backup Appliance node and
external proxy.
DNS Configuration
The DNS server plays a very important role during the VMware Backup Appliance
configuration and backup/restore operations. You must add an entry to the DNS Server
for the VMware Backup Appliance IP address and Fully Qualified Domain Names (FQDNs).
The DNS server must support both forward and reverse lookup for the following:
l
VMware Backup Appliance
l
External Proxy
l
NetWorker server
l
Data Domain device
l
vCenter and ESXi hosts
NOTICE
Failure to set up DNS properly can cause many runtime or configuration issues. Do not
manually change entries in the /etc/hosts file on the VMware Backup appliance.
You can set details for the DNS server and network IP during deployment of the VMware
Backup Appliance in the Deploy OVF Template window, as described in the section
Deploy the VMware Backup Appliance on page 35.
To confirm your DNS configuration, open a command prompt and run the following
commands from the vCenter Server.
Procedure
1. To verify DNS configuration, type the following:
nslookup VMware_Backup_Appliance_IP_address DNS_IP_address
2. To verify that the FQDN of the VMware Backup appliance resolves to the correct IP
address, type the following:
nslookup VMware_Backup_Appliance_FQDN DNS_IP_address
Ensure this is the same IP as the previous command.
Pre-installation requirements
31
NetWorker VMware Protection
3. To verify that the FQDN of the vCenter Server resolves to the correct IP address, type
the following:
nslookup vCenter_FQDN DNS_IP_address
If the nslookup commands return the proper information, then close the command
prompt; if not, correct the DNS configuration. If you configure short names for the DNS
entries, then perform additional look-ups for the short names.
NOTICE
After deployment, check for DNS resolution (forward and reverse) from the VMware
Backup appliances and proxies for vCenter and the NetWorker hosts.
NTP Configuration
The VMware Backup Appliance leverages VMware Tools to synchronize time through NTP
by using the Sync guest OS time with host option by default.
On ESXi hosts, the vCenter server, and the NetWorker server, you must configure NTP
properly. Since the VMware Backup Appliance obtains the correct time through VMware
Tools, the appliance does not require configuration with NTP. However, you must ensure
that the time on the vCenter server and the ESX that hosts the VMware Backup Appliance
are as close as possible, for example, within 30 seconds of each other. This will occur
when the vCenter server is on same host as the ESX that hosts the VMware Backup
Appliance, but when this is not the case, you should configure NTP on the VMware
Backup Appliance in order to keep host times in sync.
Note
If you configure NTP directly in the EMC Backup and Recovery Configuration Utility
window, then time synchronization errors occur.
ESXi and vCenter Server documentation provides more information about configuring
NTP.
Downloading the OVAs for EMC Backup and Recovery
You can obtain the VMware Backup appliance by downloading the VMware bundles,
which appear as OVAs. Access these OVAs from the Downloads for NetWorker page of the
EMC online support site at http://support.emc.com. In the Support by Product page,
search for NetWorker, and then select Downloads. The Downloads page allows you to
select NetWorker by release.
Note
EMC does not recommend configuring a NetWorker 8.2 VMware Backup Appliance and an
OVA earlier than NetWorker 8.2 in the same vCenter.
Three VMware bundles and one ISO update are available. Each fulfills a specific
requirement:
32
l
0.5 TB OVA — download the 0.5TB appliance when performing backups to a Data
Domain system, or when protecting fewer than 10 VMs using internal storage.
l
4 TB OVA — download the 4TB appliance when performing backups to internal
storage and protecting more than 10 VMs. The following table provides
recommendations on provisioning memory and swap space based on the storage
space in use.
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Table 7 Recommended memory and swap space based on storage space utilization
Utilization
Physical Memory Swap Space
less than 25% (1.0 TB) 12 GB
16 GB
less than 65% (2.5 TB) 18 GB
16 GB
up to 100% (4.0 TB)
16 GB
24 GB
l
EBR-Proxy OVA — download the external proxy appliance when performing more than
eight concurrent backups, or to improve performance in certain situations. For
example, you may need to deploy an external proxy to an ESX server in order to
perform hotadd backups of VMs on that server. The section EMC Backup and
Recovery Configure window setup on page 50 provides the steps required to deploy
an external proxy.
l
EBRUpgrade — download this ISO if you need to update the deployed VMware
Backup appliance to the latest version.
Other system requirements for the appliances are provided in NetWorker VMware
Protection requirements on page 27. Download the desired OVA and place in shared
storage.
OVA files for the NetWorker 8.2 SP2 VMware Backup Appliances
Networker 8.2 SP2 provides the following OVA files for the 0.5 TB, 4 TB, and external
proxy VMware Backup Appliances, in addition to the appliance for upgrading your OVA
version.
The following table provides version information for the new OVAs.
Table 8 OVA versions for NetWorker 8.2 SP2 VMware Backup Appliances
File name
Description
EBR-0.5TB-1.1.2.6.ova
NetWorker 8.2.2 OVA for the 0.5 TB VMware Backup
Appliance
EBR-4.0TB-1.1.2.6.ova
NetWorker 8.2.2 OVA for the 4 TB VMware Backup Appliance
EBR-Proxy-1.1.2.6.ova
NetWorker 8.2.2 OVA for the External proxy that supports
EXT4 backup and recovery
EbrUpgradeFrom70To-7.1.62-4.iso NetWorker 8.2.2 ISO file for upgrading the OVAs
If you previously deployed OVA versions 1.1.1.46, you must apply a patch before
upgrading to OVA version 1.1.2.6. When you download the OVA from https://
support.emc.com/downloads/1095_NetWorker a document displays which contains the
patch links with instructions for installation. After applying the patches, you may then
proceed to upgrade from OVA version 1.1.1.46 to OVA version 1.1.2.6. If you are not
running OVA version 1.1.1.46, you do not need to apply the patches and can upgrade
directly to OVA version 1.1.2.6.
EMC strongly recommends also upgrading your NetWorker Server and Storage Nodes to
Networker 8.2 SP2.
Downloading the OVAs for EMC Backup and Recovery
33
NetWorker VMware Protection
OVA files for the NetWorker 8.2 SP1 VMware Backup Appliances
Networker 8.2 SP1 provides the following OVA files for the 0.5 TB, 4 TB, and external
proxy VMware Backup Appliances, in addition to the appliance for upgrading your OVA
version.
The following table provides version information for the new OVAs.
Table 9 OVA versions for NetWorker 8.2 SP1 VMware Backup Appliances
File name
Description
EBR-0.5TB-1.1.1.50.ova
NetWorker 8.2.1 OVA for the 0.5 TB VMware Backup
Appliance
EBR-4.0TB-1.1.1.50.ova
NetWorker 8.2.1 OVA for the 4 TB VMware Backup
Appliance
EBR-Proxy-1.1.1.50.ova
NetWorker 8.2.1 OVA for the External proxy that supports
EXT4 backup and recovery
EbrUpgradeFrom70To-7.1.61-10.iso NetWorker 8.2.1 ISO file for upgrading the OVAs
If you previously deployed OVA versions 1.1.1.46, you must apply a patch before
upgrading to OVA version 1.1.1.50. When you download the OVA from https://
support.emc.com/downloads/1095_NetWorker a document displays which contains the
patch links with instructions for installation. After applying the patches, you may then
proceed to upgrade from OVA version 1.1.1.46 to OVA version 1.1.1.50. If you are not
running OVA version 1.1.1.46, you do not need to apply the patches and can upgrade
directly to OVA version 1.1.1.50.
EMC strongly recommends also upgrading your NetWorker Server and Storage Nodes to
Networker cumulative build 8.2.1.3.
OVA 1.1.1.50 fixes the following issues:
l
Knowledge Base 201864 - FLR Fails for VMs with larger disks and shows 'Failed to get
disks: Unable to browse as proxies are unavailable'
l
Knowledge Base 201865 - Clients VMs are removed from VMware Protection Policies
OVA 1.1.1.46 fixes the following issues:
l
226264 - glibc versions vulnerability
l
226834 - Resurrect restore from Data Domain hangs in Import operation with errors
l
226240 - Circular deadlock problem in rwmutex
l
hfscheck failures fix detailed in Knowledgebase article 197864, available at https://
support.emc.com
Proxy assignment for backup and recovery
When you have more than 10 VMs to protect, backup and recover operations require the
deployment of proxy VMs. The OVA described in the section Deploying the VMware
Backup appliance on page 35 has 8 internal proxies that allow you to backup 8 VMs
concurrently. To back up more than 8 VMs concurrently, you must deploy an external
proxy VM that encompasses 8 internal proxies. The section Deploy external proxy
appliance in vCenter on page 36 describes how to deploy the external proxy OVA. You
assign a proxy for 1 backup or 1 recover of a VM at a point in time.
34
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
EMC Backup and Recovery selects a proxy from the proxy pool based on its availability
and periodically refreshes the Proxy to datastore association.
Deploying the VMware Backup appliance
These deployment steps apply to each OVA, including the proxy OVA. Once you download
the .ova files to shared storage, open the vSphere Web Client.
To deploy the .ova:
Procedure
1. In the vSphere Web Client, navigate to Home > vCenter > Hosts and Clusters.
2. Right-click the vCenter server and select Deploy OVF template.
3. In the Select source window, select Local file and then click Browse, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 1 Selecting the OVA to deploy in vCenter/vSphere Web Client
4. In the filetype drop-down, select OVA Packages then navigate to the directory that
contains the ova files. Select the file and then click Open.
5. On the Deploy OVF Template window, click Next.
6. On the Review Details window, click Next.
7. Accept the EULA and click Next.
8. Specify a name for the VMware Backup appliance, and then select the folder or
datacenter to which you want to deploy the appliance. Click Next.
9. Select the resource where you want to deploy the VMware Backup appliance, then
click Next.
10.Select Storage, then select the virtual disk format and click Next. EMC recommends
thin provisioning disk format.
11.On Setup Networks, select the destination network from the drop-down, then click
Next.
12.Provide the networking properties, including the correct IP (static IP), DNS, and so on.
Verify this information is correct, otherwise the appliance will not work. Click Next.
13.In the Ready to Complete window, ensure that the Power-on after deployment option
is selected, then click Finish.
Deploying the VMware Backup appliance
35
NetWorker VMware Protection
Results
After a few minutes a screen similar to the following figure appears in the console of the
VMware Backup appliance in vCenter.
Figure 2 EMC Backup and Recovery registration
Deploy external proxy appliance in vCenter
This topic describes how to deploy the proxy appliance in the vCenter.
Procedure
1. Launch the vSphere client and log in to the vCenter server.
The vSphere Client window appears.
2. Select File > Deploy OVF Template.
The Deploy OVF Template wizard appears.
3. In the Source screen, complete the following.
a. Select Deploy from file or URL and click Browse.
The Open dialog box appears.
b. Select Ova files (*.ova) from the Files of Type list.
c. Browse to the proxy OVA file that was previously downloaded in Downloading the
OVAs for EMC Backup and Recovery on page 32.
d. Select the proxy appliance template file and click Open.
The Open dialog box closes.
The full path to the appliance template file appears in the Deploy from file field.
e. Click Next.
The OVF Template Details screen appears.
4. In the OVF Template Details screen, complete the following.
a. Ensure that the template information is correct.
36
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
b. Click Next.
The End User License agreement appears.
5. Accept the agreement, and then click Next.
The Name and Location screen appears.
6. In the Name and Location screen, complete the following.
a. Type a unique fully-qualified hostname in the Name field.
A Proxy can potentially have three different names:
l
The name of the ESX on which the proxy runs. This is also the name managed
and visible within vCenter.
l
The DNS name assigned to the proxy VM.
l
The VMware Backup appliance hostname after the proxy registers and activates
with the server.
As a best practice, EMC strongly recommends that you consistently use the
same fully-qualified hostname for this proxy in all contexts.
b. Select a datacenter and folder location for this proxy in the Inventory tree.
c. Click Next.
The Host / Cluster screen appears.
7. In the Host / Cluster screen, complete the following.
a. Select an ESX server or cluster.
b. Click Next.
If you selected a cluster, the Specific Host screen appears.
8. In the Specific Host screen, complete the following.
a. Select a specific ESX server from the Host Name list.
b. Click Next.
The Resource pool screen appears.
9. In the Resource pool screen, complete the following.
a. Select a resource pool for this proxy.
b. Click Next.
The Storage screen appears.
10.In the Storage screen, complete the following.
a. Select a storage location for this proxy.
b. Click Next.
The Disk Format screen appears.
11.In the Disk Formatscreen, complete the following.
a. Accept the suggested default setting for Available Space (GB).
b. Accept the suggested default provisioning setting (Thin Provision).
Deploy external proxy appliance in vCenter
37
NetWorker VMware Protection
c. Click Next.
The Network Mapping screen appears.
12.In the Network Mapping screen, complete the following.
a. Select a destination network from list.
b. Click Next.
The Networking Properties screen appears.
NOTICE
Proxy network settings are difficult to change after you register and activate the
Proxy. Therefore, ensure that you type the correct settings in this screen.
13.In the Networking Properties screen, complete the following.
a. In the Default Gateway field, type the default gateway IP address for your network.
b. Enter one or more Domain Name Server (DNS) hostnames or IP addresses in the
DNS field. Separate multiple entries with commas.
c. Enter a valid routable IP address on your network in the Network IP Address field.
d. Type the correct netmask for your network in the Network Netmask field.
14.Click Next.
The Ready To Complete screen appears.
15.Ensure that the information is correct.
16.Click Finish.
The Deploy OVF Template wizard closes.
17.Wait for the deployment operation to complete.
This might take several minutes.
A confirmation message appears.
18.Click Close to dismiss the confirmation message.
Once you deploy the proxy, navigate to the console of the VM in the vSphere client.
38
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Figure 3 Registering proxy with the VMware Backup appliance
19.Follow the prompts to register the proxy, as shown in the figure above.
a. Press 1 to register the proxy.
b. At the Enter the EMC Backup and Recovery Appliance address prompt, type the
FQDN of the VMware Backup appliance server name.
c. At the Enter the server domain [clients]: prompt, press enter and do not modify.
d. Provide the VMware Backup appliance password if using a non-default password.
e. Wait for the Attempting to connect to the appliance...Connection successful
message.
20.Validate the registration in the NMC Devices tab by ensuring that the external proxy
host appears under the External Proxy Hosts column of the VMware Backup appliance
that it is registered to.
Note
When you upgrade the VMware Backup appliance, you need to deploy a new proxy
appliance. After rebooting the VMware Backup Appliance, you do not need to reregister the external proxy.
After you deploy external Proxy hosts, each Proxy provides all of the following
capabilities:
l
Backup of Microsoft Windows and Linux VMs. This includes entire images or
specific drives.
l
Restore of Microsoft Windows and Linux VMs. This includes entire images or
specific drives.
l
Selective restore of individual folders and files to Microsoft Windows and Linux
VMs.
Although you can restore data across datacenters by using a proxy deployed in one
datacenter to restore files to a VM in another datacenter, the restores will take
Deploy external proxy appliance in vCenter
39
NetWorker VMware Protection
noticeably longer than if the proxy and the target VM are both located in the same
datacenter. Therefore, for best performance, deploy at least one proxy in each
datacenter you are protecting.
Add DNS Entries
When you deploy a Proxy appliance, as described in Deploy external proxy appliance in
vCenter on page 36, you must specify a unique IP address and name to each proxy VM.
The vCenter server performs name resolution lookups to ensure that the host can resolve
the name and IP address. For best results, configure all required DNS entries for the
proxies you plan to deploy before performing the following steps.
Re-registering the proxy with a different server
Procedure
1. Launch the EMC Backup and Recovery Console in the vSphere Client, then log in to the
proxy.
2. Run the following command:
/usr/local/avamarclient/etc/initproxyappliance.sh start
Unregister proxies no longer required
Check to ensure that the VMware Backup Appliance does not have any unrequired or
unsuccessfully deployed proxy clients, and unregister these proxies.
To check for unrequired or unsuccessfully deployed proxy clients, run the following
command on the VMware Backup Appliance:
mccli client show --recursive=true | grep i Proxy
Example 1 Output for unsuccessfully deployed proxy client
The following example shows an unsuccessfully deployed proxy created with
localhost.localdomain:
mccli client show --recursive=true | grep i Proxy
ebr.my.local /clients
VMware Image Proxy with Guest Backup
localhost.localdom /clients VMware Image Proxy with Guest
For sites experiencing such registrations, please contact EMC support to unregister the
proxies in error, and then check all of your external proxy appliances using the above
command to ensure the hostname is correct before registering the name with the VMware
Backup Appliance.
Note
The proactive_check.pl script includes a check discover proxies that have not been
checked in the last 24 hours.
40
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Upgrade the VMware Backup Appliance and vCenter
The following section provides considerations and instructions for upgrading the VMware
Backup Appliance and the vCenter server to the latest version.
Upgrade the vCenter server software
NetWorker VMware Protection in NetWorker 8.2 SP2 requires a minimum version of
vCenter 5.5, and supports up to vCenter 6.0. The following sections provide
considerations and instructions when upgrading to a supported vCenter version.
Upgrading vCenter from version 5.1 to 5.5
The following considerations apply if upgraded your vCenter version from vCenter 5.1 to
vCenter 5.5.
l
l
If you created a non-root user (for example, test) in vCenter 5.1 using the minimum
required privileges, this user cannot log in to vCenter after you upgrade to vCenter 5.5
because the username must now contain the full domain/path, in the form DOMAIN
\test. Use the domain that was assigned during the creation of the user in vCenter
5.1.
If you deployed and configured a VMware Backup Appliance with this non-root user
test in vCenter 5.1, you must perform the following steps in order to connect to the
VMware Backup Appliance after upgrading to vCenter 5.5:
1. From a web browser, type the following URL:
https://<IP_address_VMware_Backup_appliance>:8543/ebr-configure
The EMC Backup and Recovery Configuration Utility window appears.
2. Click the Configuration tab and unlock the vCenter registration.
3. Change the username to DOMAIN\test, and then save and reboot the appliance.
Figure 4 Unlock the vCenter Registration in the EMC Backup and Recovery Configuration Utility
Upgrade the VMware Backup Appliance and vCenter
41
NetWorker VMware Protection
Upgrading vCenter to version 6.0
If using vCenter version 5.1 or 5.5 and a VMware Backup Appliance previous to
NetWorker 8.2 SP2, perform the following steps to upgrade vCenter to 6.0 and the
VMware Backup Appliance to the latest version for NetWorker 8.2 SP2.
Note
In the example provided, a dedicated non-root user test has been set up with the
domain name system-domain and configured with a VMware Backup Appliance previous
to NetWorker 8.2 SP2. You will need to change the domain of the dedicated non-root user
from system-domain to vsphere.local by using the vSphere Web Client, and change
the vCenter username in the EMC Backup and Recovery Configuration Utility window
from test@system-domain to test1@vsphere.local to re-register the VMware backup
Appliance with vCenter.
Procedure
1. Upgrade vCenter 5.1 or vCenter 5.5 to vCenter version 6.0.
2. Open the vSphere Web Client for vCenter 6.0 with administrator@vsphere.local
as the username and use the password you set during the vCenter upgrade procedure,
and perform the following:
a. In the left pane, select Administration > Users and Groups, and then click the +
sign to create a new user, test1.
b. In the Administration pane, select Roles.
c. Right-click on the role which you assigned to the user test and select Clone to
create a new role, test1role.
d. Select vCenter > Hosts and Clusters > Manage > Permissions, and then click the +
sign.
e. In the Users and Groups pane, click Add and select the user test1 with the
domain vsphere.local. Assign the role as test1Role and click Add.
3. Open the EMC Backup and Recovery Configuration Utility window as shown in the
figure above, and change the vCenter username from test@system-domain to
test1@vsphere.local to re-register the VMware backup Appliance with vCenter,
and then restart the appliance to apply the changes.
4. Upgrade the VMware Backup Appliance to NetWorker 8.2 SP2.
Considerations prior to upgrading
When you upgrade the VMware Backup appliance, first upgrade the NetWorker version,
then upgrade the Data Domain operating system (DDOS), and then upgrade the
appliance.
The bold components in the following diagram illustrate the order of upgrading for
supported versions.
42
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Figure 5 Upgrading order for NetWorker components when upgrading the VMware Backup
appliance
Before upgrading, also review the following considerations:
l
The VMware Backup appliance version 1.1.x is only compatible with the NetWorker
8.2 server software.
l
You cannot run backup and recovery operations during an appliance upgrade. Before
performing the upgrade, ensure that you complete any policies running or disable
active policies.
l
The VMware Backup Appliance and external proxy appliances must be at the same
version. Note, however, that you cannot upgrade external proxies. If using a previous
version of the external proxy, to upgrade you must redeploy the external proxy.
If you deployed an external proxy prior to upgrading the VMware Backup appliance,
restart all external proxy VMs.
Upgrade the VMware Backup appliance
Use the following procedure to upgrade the VMware Backup appliance.
Procedure
1. Verify that the account connecting to vCenter has the required level of permissions,
particularly if a non-admin user. The section Create a customized role on page 46
provides a list of permissions.
If the permissions are not correct before the upgrade, then the upgrade process may
fail or leave the system in an inconsistent state.
2. If you made any changes to the /etc/hosts file, remove these changes. EMC does not
recommend manually changing entries in the etc/hosts file on the VMware Backup
appliance.
3. Create and validate a checkpoint of the existing VMware Backup appliance by running
an integrity check.
a. Click the Configuration tab.
b. Select the Run integrity Check option, as shown in Figure 45 on page 102.
4. Shut down the VMware Backup appliance, and then create a snapshot of the EMC
Backup and Recovery VM by right-clicking the VM in the vSphere Client and selecting
Snapshot > Take Snapshot..., as shown in the following figure.
Upgrade the VMware Backup Appliance and vCenter
43
NetWorker VMware Protection
Figure 6 Take Snapshot in vSphere Client
5. Restart the appliance.
6. Verify the md5 checksum of the upgrade package.
7. Attach the ISO to the VMware Backup appliance by selecting Connect to ISO image on
local disk in the vSphere Client, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 7 Connect to ISO in vSphere Client
8. Open the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window. The section Post-Installation
configuration in the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window on page 53
provides information about the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window.
9. Navigate to the Upgrade tab and click Check Upgrades. The available upgrade
package appears.
10.Navigate to the Status tab to ensure all services are running.
11.Return to the Upgrade tab and click Upgrade EBR.
44
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
When the upgrade completes, the VMware Backup appliance shuts down
automatically.
12.Power on the VMware Backup appliance.
When you launch the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the vSphere Web
Client, and then connect to the upgraded appliance and navigate to the Configuration
tab, the new version appears.
Note
When you complete a successful upgrade and verify that all backup and restore
functionality is working as expected, return to the vSphere Client to delete the
snapshot taken in step 4.
Enable VMware View in NMC after upgrading by creating a NSR Hypervisor resource
When you upgrade the NetWorker server to NetWorker 8.2 or later and upgrade to the
latest VMware Backup appliance(s), VMware View may not appear in NMC until you
create a NSR Hypervisor resource.
Perform one of the following to create the NSR Hypervisor resource.
l
Download and deploy a NetWorker 8.2 or later VMware Backup appliance from
vCenter, following the registration steps outlined in the section EMC Backup and
Recovery Configure window setup on page 50.
l
Manually create a NSR Hypervisor resource by using the nsradmin program. The
section Configuring a VADP proxy host and Hypervisor resource manually by using
nsradmin on page 144 provides steps to create the NSR Hypervisor resource.
Note
If you created a NSR Hypervisor resource for VADP prior to the upgrade, then VMware
view will work.
Creating a dedicated vCenter user account and EMC Backup and
Recovery role
EMC strongly recommends that you set up a separate vCenter user account that is strictly
dedicated for use with NetWorker VMware Protection. Use of a generic user account such
as “Administrator” might make future troubleshooting efforts difficult as it might not be
clear which “Administrator” actions are actually interfacing, or communicating, with the
NetWorker server. Using a separate vCenter user account ensures maximum clarity if it
becomes necessary to examine vCenter logs.
Create vCenter user account
Procedure
1. From a web browser, type the following:
https://<IP_address_vCenter_Server>:5480
The VMware vCenter Server Appliance login page appears.
2. Enter the vCenter root user credentials to login.
Creating a dedicated vCenter user account and EMC Backup and Recovery role
45
NetWorker VMware Protection
3. In the VMware vCenter Server Appliance Console, click the Summary tab, and then
click the Stop button next to the Server service in the vCenter pane.
4. Click the SSO tab, and then select Embedded from the SSO deployment type dropdown and assign a password. Click Save settings.
5. Click the Summary tab, and then click the Start button next to the Server service in
the vCenter pane. Log out of the session.
6. From a web browser, connect to the vSphere Web Client:
https://<IP_address_vCenter_Server>:9443/vSphere-client/
7. Login as user administrator@vsphere.local with the password you created in step 4.
8. Navigate to Home > Administration > SSO Users and Groups.
9. On the Users tab, click on the green +. The New User window appears.
10.In the Username field, specify a username (for example, EMC Backup and Recovery).
11.In the Password and Confirm Password fields, specify a password. You can leave the
First name, last name and password fields blank.
12.Click OK.
Create a customized role
Procedure
1. In the vSphere Web Client, open Administration > Role Manager and click on the green
+.
The Create Role dialog appears.
2. Type the name of this role (for example, Admin1).
3. Select all the privileges listed in the following table and click OK. This vCenter user
account must have these privileges at a minimum.
Table 10 Minimum required vCenter user account privileges
Setting
vCenter 5.5 required privileges
Alarms
l
Create alarm
l
Modify alarm
l
Allocate space
l
Browse datastore
l
Configure datastore
l
Low level file operations
l
Move datastore
l
Remove datastore
l
Remove file
l
Rename datastore
l
Register extension
l
Unregister extension
Datastore
Extension
46
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Table 10 Minimum required vCenter user account privileges (continued)
Setting
vCenter 5.5 required privileges
l
Update extension
Folder
l
Create folder
Global
l
Cancel task
l
Disable methods
l
Enable methods
l
Licenses
l
Log event
l
Manage custom attributes
l
Settings
Host
l
Configuration > Storage partition configuration
Network
l
Assign network
l
Configure
l
Assign virtual machine to resource pool
l
Migrate powered off virtual machine
l
Migrate powered on virtual machine
Sessions
l
Validate session
Tasks
l
Create task
l
Update task
l
Export
l
Import
l
vApp application configuration
l
Add existing disk
l
Add new disk
l
Add or remove device
l
Advanced
l
Change CPU count
l
Change resource
l
Disk change tracking
l
Disk Lease
l
Extend virtual disk
l
Host USB device
l
Memory
Resource
vApp
Virtual Machine
Configuration
Create a customized role
47
NetWorker VMware Protection
Table 10 Minimum required vCenter user account privileges (continued)
Setting
Guest Operations
Interaction
Inventory
Provisioning
Snapshot Management
48
vCenter 5.5 required privileges
l
Modify device setting
l
Raw device
l
Reload from path
l
Remove disk
l
Rename
l
Reset guest information
l
Set annotation
l
Settings
l
Swapfile placement
l
Upgrade virtual machine compatibility
l
Guest operation modifications
l
Guest operation program execution
l
Guest operation queries
l
Configure CD media
l
Console interaction
l
Device Connection
l
Guest operating system management by VIX API
l
Power off
l
Power on
l
Reset
l
VMware Tools install
l
Create new
l
Register
l
Remove
l
Unregister
l
Allow disk access
l
Allow read-only disk access
l
Allow virtual machine download
l
Mark as Template
l
Create snapshot
l
Remove Snapshot
l
Revert to snapshot
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
vSphere Client user accounts
Before you can use the vCenter user account with theVMware Backup appliance, or
before you can use the Single Sign-on (SSO) admin user with the VMware Backup
appliance, add these users as administrator on the vCenter root node. Users who inherit
permissions from group roles are not valid.
Note
In high-security environments, you can restrict the vCenter user account permissions
required to configure and administer the VMware Backup appliance. Table 10 on page 46
provides the account permission categories.
The following steps allow you to configure the EMC Backup and Recovery user or SSO
admin user by using the vSphere Web Client.
Procedure
1. From a web browser, access the vSphere Web Client.
https://<IP_address_vCenter_Server>:9443/vsphere-client/
2. Login with administrative rights.
3. Select vCenter > Hosts and Clusters.
Figure 8 Hosts and Clusters in the vSphere Web Client
4. On the left side of the page, click on vCenter Servers. It is important that you select
this from the root level of the tree structure (represented under Hosts and Clusters). If
you select the vCenter VM, the configuration fails.
5. Click the Manage tab and then select Permissions.
6. Click the Add permission (+) icon.
7. In the Users and Groups pane, click Add...
The Select Users/Groups dialog box appears.
vSphere Client user accounts
49
NetWorker VMware Protection
8. From the Domain drop-down select domain, server, or SYSTEM-DOMAIN.
9. Select the user that will administer EMC Backup and Recovery, or the SSO admin user,
and then click Add.
If the EMC Backup and Recovery user belongs to a domain account, then the account
appears in the format “SYSTEM-DOMAIN\admin” format. If the user name appears in
the format “admin@SYSTEM-DOMAIN”, then tasks related to the backup job may not
appear on the Running tab of the Recent Tasks window.
10.Click OK.
11.From the Assigned Role drop-down list, select the role you created.
12.Confirm that the Propagate to children objects box is checked.
13.Click OK.
Restrict mapping of datastores
You can perform VM backups by using one of two methods:
l
Hotadd — The VMware Backup Appliance or External proxy directly mounts the VM's
hard disk to read the backup data. This mode requires that the proxy has direct
access to the datastore of the VM that you want to back up.
l
NBD — The VMware Backup Appliance or External proxy will connect to the ESX server
that the VM is running on over the IP network, and data will be transferred over the IP
network to the proxy. As a result, NBD mode is typically slower than hotadd mode.
By default, hotadd mode is used. If the proxy does not have direct access to the datastore
that the VM is running on, it will fall back to using NBD mode to improve the chances of
obtaining a successful backup.
In certain environments, you may want to prevent fallback to NBD backups to ensure no
backup traffic occurs across the IP network. In such cases, you can configure your system
to use an alternate mode where backup jobs will only be given to proxies that have the
ability to perform a hotadd backup of the VM. When configuring this mode, you must
deploy an external proxy on an ESX server that has access to the datastore that the VM
resides on. Failure to do so results in the backup failing with the error “No Proxy.”
To configure this mode of operation, you can select the option in the NSR VBA Server
Properties window, described in the section VMware Backup Appliance in NMC on page
62.
EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window setup
Complete the VMware Backup appliance registration and configuration by using the EMC
Backup and Recovery Configure window.
Procedure
1. Open an internet browser and type the URL to connect to the VMware Backup
appliance. The URL will be similar to the following.
http://VMware Backup appliance FQDN:8580/ebr-configure
When connected, the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window appears, as
shown in the following figure.
50
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Figure 9 EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window’s Welcome page
NOTICE
The EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window requires Adobe Flash player version
11.5 or later. If you do not have the appropriate version of Adobe Flash Player installed, a
message appears with a link to download. If you are still unable to connect after
installing Adobe Flash Player, then check the network configuration (IP address, DNS, and
so on) by logging into the VMware Backup appliance registration screen. If any of the
network information was incorrectly entered, you must re-deploy.
2. Log in with the default userid and password:
l
userid: root
l
password: 8RttoTriz
3. In the Welcome page, click Next.
4. Verify the IP configuration in the Network settings, then click Next.
5. Set the time zone to match that of the vCenter appliance, otherwise you may
encounter issues connecting with EMC Backup and Recovery from vCenter. The default
time zone for vCenter is UTC. Click Next.
6. Specify a new EMC Backup and Recovery password for the root account, then click
Next.
7. In vCenter registration, type the details required to connect to the appliance.
Note
When you use the FQDN or IP to register the vCenter server in this window and with
the NetWorker server, ensure that you specify only the FQDN or only the IP in both
instances, not a combination of the two.
8. Click Test connection.
9. Ensure that Use vCenter for SSO authentication remains selected as shown in the
following figure. Click Next.
EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window setup
51
NetWorker VMware Protection
Figure 10 EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window during registration
Note
If the vCenter server host is different from the vSphere web server host, use
admin@system/domain as the user name along with the appropriate password.
10.In NetWorker Registration, type the details required to connect to the NetWorker
Server:
l
NetWorker user name = VMUser (default).
l
NetWorker password = changeme (default)
l
NetWorker FQDN or IP
l
NetWorker web service port = 8080 (default)
Note
To change the default name VMUser, in NMC go to NetWorker Administration >
NetWorker server properties > Miscellaneous, and change both the user name and
password. Ensure that when you change the user name and password in NMC that
you specify the new values in NetWorker Registration.
11.Click Test NetWorker connection to test the connection. If performing a disaster
recover, select the Override NetWorker registration option if the VMware Backup
appliance has registered to the NetWorker server.
12.Click Finish. A message appears indicating that configuration is complete and the
VMware Backup appliance will reboot.
Results
Once the reboot completes, allow up to one hour for the deployed VMware Backup
appliance to appear in NMC. During this time, do not make any changes to the EMC
Backup and Recovery configuration or the NetWorker server configuration. When the
deployment completes successfully, the state of the VMware Backup appliance appears
in NMC, and a message appears in the Logs pane of the NMC Configuration tab.
52
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Post-Installation configuration in the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window
To confirm that the installation process successfully registered and configured the
VMware Backup Appliance in NetWorker:
Procedure
1. Ensure that the Log window in NMC displays:
NetWorker server, 'server_name' registration succeeded for VMware
Backup Appliance VBA_hostname
2. Log in to the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window by using the new EMC
Backup and Recovery password that you defined during configuration.
Results
When you open the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window after registration, the
window in the following figure displays, allowing you to verify information about your
configuration and to ensure the required services are running.
Figure 11 EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window after registration
Status tab
The Status tab lists all of the services required by EMC Backup and Recovery and the
current status of each service. The following table describes these services.
Table 11 Description of services running on the VMware Backup appliance
Service
Description
Core services
Comprise the backup engine of the appliance. If these services are disabled
no backup jobs (either scheduled or “on demand”) will run, and no restore
activities can be initiated.
Post-Installation configuration in the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window
53
NetWorker VMware Protection
Table 11 Description of services running on the VMware Backup appliance (continued)
Service
Description
Management
services
Stop these services only under the direction of technical support.
File system
services
Allow mounting of backups for file-level restore operations.
File level restore
services
Support the management of file-level restore operations.
Maintenance
services
Perform maintenance tasks (for example, evaluating whether retention
periods of backups have expired). Services will start up at the Start Time for
the first maintenance window after 24 hours have elapsed.
For example, if the system was deployed at 10.20am on Thursday, then 24
hours after this would be 10.20am on Friday. The next maintenance window
would then start at 8am on Saturday. The maintenance window is scheduled
by default to start at 8am each day.
You can make changes to the default maintenance window by using the
command line. The section Changing the Maintenance window on page 55
provides more information.
Maintenance services would not be running after deployment, as shown in
the above figure.
Note
When any service stops running, the action triggers an alarm on the vCenter server. When
the service restarts, vCenter clears the alarm. A delay of up to 10 minutes can occur
before vCenter clears or triggers an alarm.
Click the refresh icon to update the status display.
Starting and Stopping Services
If all services are stopped, then start the services in the following order:
Procedure
1. Core services
2. Management services
3. Maintenance services
4. File system services
5. File level restore services
Results
To stop a service, click Stop next to the service on the Status tab of EMC Backup and
Recovery Configure window. In general, you should only stop running services under the
direction of Technical Support.
If you stop a service, you can attempt to restart it by clicking Start. In some cases,
additional troubleshooting steps may be required for the service to work properly.
54
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Collecting log files
You can collect log files by clicking the Collect Logs button on the Status tab of the EMC
Backup and Recovery Configure window. The Log Collector zips the log files which you
can save to the machine that launched the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window.
Figure 12 Collecting log files in the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window
Changing the Maintenance window
Use the following procedure if you want to change the backup schedule (maintenance
window) settings. This example demonstrates how to change the maintenance window
from the default (8 PM to 8 AM the following day) to a custom value (6 PM to 2 PM the
following day):
Procedure
1. Check the current schedule by running the following from the command line:
admin@ebr169:/usr/local/avamar/bin/>: status.dpn
The end of the output indicates the current settings for backup window and
maintenance window start times.
Next backup window start time: Sat Sep 28 20:00:00 2013 IST
Next maintenance window start time: Sat Sep 28 08:00:00 2013 IST
2. Change the backup start time (in format HHMM) and duration (in format HHMM) by
running:
admin@ebr169:/usr/local/avamar/bin/>: avmaint sched window -backup-start=1800 --backup-duration=2000 --ava
Post-Installation configuration in the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window
55
NetWorker VMware Protection
3. Verify the change by running:
admin@ebr169:/usr/local/avamar/bin/>: status.dpn
The end of the output indicates the new backup window and maintenance window
start times:
Next backup window start time: Sat Sep 28 18:00:00 2013 IST
Next maintenance window start time: Sat Sep 28 14:00:00 2013 IST
Dual NIC support
This section outlines NetWorker support for enabling the VMware Backup appliance and
External proxy appliance to support two virtual network interface cards (vNIC).
Enabling a second vNIC on the VMware Backup appliance and the External proxy
appliance can provide the following benefits:
l
You can separate the backup data traffic going to the back-end from the production
network so that backups do not negatively impact performance in your environment.
l
You can use a separate private or isolated physical network infrastructure for your
backup network and send the backup data in this isolated network unencrypted,
leading to performance gains.
l
You can dedicate a NIC to backup traffic so as not to impact production performance
if using an older host with a slower physical NIC.
Setup and configuration requirements
Along with the requirements specified in the sections Pre-installation requirements on
page 30 and Download and deploy the VMware Backup appliances on page 30, the
VMware Backup appliance and external proxy appliance only support dual vNIC when you
manually add a new vNIC of type E1000. Additionally, you must configure the two vNICs
with two separate and unique subnets in order to facilitate the direction of production
traffic (which includes vCenter Server traffic, VMTools requests used by FLR, and so on)
on the first vNIC. All backup traffic will flow out of the second vNIC on the backup
network.
The VMware Backup appliance and external proxy appliance must have eth0 belong to
the production network and contained within the same subnet which includes your
vCenter Server eth0. For the VMware Backup appliance and external proxy appliance,
eth1 must belong to the backup network and contained within the same subnet as the
Data Domain device.
Note
In order to use FLR, eth0 on the VMware Backup appliance and external proxy appliance
should be on the production network and eth1 on the backup network.
Note
In order to use Instant Access restore, which will mount a NFS Data-store on the ESX, the
backup network on the ESX may require a VMkernel port configured.
56
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Figure 13 Backup and production network traffic
You can use a non-routable private address space for the subnet used for the backup
traffic/data, providing that all devices/vNICs using a private IP address exist on the same
physical switch and there is a DNS server on the non-routed private network so that the
proxies can perform a reverse lookup for its host name.
vNIC setup for the VMware Backup appliance
The following section describes how to set up vNIC for the VMware Backup appliance:
Before you begin
Performing this setup requires that you download and deploy the VMware Backup
appliance, and then use the following steps to configure the appliance instead of the
steps outlined in the section EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window setup on page
50. When you deploy the VMware Backup appliance, configure the vNIC, or eth0, with an
IP address from the production subnet/VLAN.
Procedure
1. Log in to the VMware Backup appliance console in the vSphere Client, and then su to root.
2. Run dpnctl stop to stop all Avamar services.
3. Right-click the VMware Backup appliance and select Power -> Shutdown Guest.
4. Add the second NIC to the VMware Backup appliance:
a. Right click the VMware Backup appliance and select Edit Settings. The Virtual
Machine Properties window appears
b. In the Hardware tab, click Add.
c. Select Ethernet Adapter and click Next.
d. In the Adapter Type field, change the value to E1000, and assign this vNIC to the
appropriate VM Port Group. Select the Connect at power on checkbox if it is not
selected.
e. Select the appropriate VM Port Group for the production network/VLAN, and then
click Next.
Setup and configuration requirements
57
NetWorker VMware Protection
f. Verify the information and then click Finish.
5. Right click the VMware Backup appliance and select Power > Power On.
Verify that you associated the NIC to the correct network by running a ping to the IP. If
the IP is not reachable, you may need to swap the network for NICs. Right-click the
VMware Backup appliance and select Edit Settings, and in the Hardware tab, select
Network adaptor and Network connection on the right of the screen, as shown in the
following.
Figure 14 Swap network for NICs in the Virtual Machine Properties window
6. Configure the second NIC on the VMware Backup appliance:
a. After you power on the VMware Backup appliance, login as root to the VMware
Backup appliance Console by using the vSphere Client.
b. Type yast2 to invoke Yast.
c. Select Network Devices and press Enter. The Network Devices dialog appears.
d. Select Network Settings and press Enter. The Network Settings dialog appears.
e. In the Overview tab, select the Second Ethernet Adapter labeled eth1.
f. Use the tab key to select Edit and press Enter.
g. From the Network Card Setup, use the tab key to access Statically assigned IP
Address and select using the spacebar. Use the tab key to select IP Address and
enter the IP Address, the Subnet Mask, and the host name of the VMware Backup
appliance for the backup network.
h. Use the tab key to select Next and press Enter.
58
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
i. From Network Settings, use the tab key to select Overview. Use the right-arrow key
to select Hostname/DNS. Use the Tab key to select and then specify the following
fields:
l
Host name
l
Domain name for the production network
l
Policy for DNS configuration (use the default policy)
l
Name Server 1 for production network
l
Name Server 2 for backup network
l
Domain Search for both production and backup network
j. From Network Settings, use the tab key to select Hostname/DNS. Use the rightarrow key to select Routing, and set the Default Gateway to the gateway/address
for the production network if not already set.
k. Use the Tab key to select OK and press Enter.
l. Use the Tab key to select Quit and press Enter.
7. From a web browser, type https://<IP_address_VMware_Backup_appliance>:8543/
ebr-configure and follow the instructions in the section EMC Backup and Recovery
Configure window setup on page 50to configure the VMware Backup appliance.
Results
Once configured, the VMware Backup appliance shows up with production network
details in NMC.
After completing the VMware Backup appliance configuration, you can perform the dual
vNIC setup for the external proxy appliance.
vNIC setup for the external proxy appliance
The following section describes how to set up vNIC for the proxy appliance.
Before you begin
Performing this setup requires that you download and deploy the proxy appliance. During
deployment, when you are prompted for an IP address, assign an IP address from the
production subnet/VLAN. This IP address must follow the normal rules for a proxy
appliance as specified in the section Pre-installation requirements on page 30 and you
must perform steps 1 through 17 in the section Deploying external proxies.
Procedure
1. Power on the proxy appliance.
The console displays a Main Menu with two options.
2. Type 2 to skip the registration.
3. When the blue splash-screen appears, right-click the proxy appliance and select
Power -> Shutdown Guest.
4. Add the second NIC to the proxy appliance:
a. Right click the proxy appliance and select Edit Settings.
b. In the Hardware tab, click Add.
c. Select Ethernet Adapter and click Next.
d. In the Adapter Type field, change the value to E1000, and assign this vNIC to the
appropriate VM Port Group. Select the Connect at power on checkbox if it is not
selected.
Setup and configuration requirements
59
NetWorker VMware Protection
e. Select the appropriate VM Port Group for the production network/VLAN, and then
click Next.
f. Verify the information and then click Finish.
5. Right click the proxy appliance and select Power > Power On.
6. Configure the second NIC on the proxy appliance:
a. After you power on the proxy appliance, skip the registration and login as root to
the proxy appliance Console by using the vSphere Client.
b. Type yast2 to invoke Yast.
c. Select Network Devices and press Enter. The Network Devices dialog appears.
d. Select Network Settings and press Enter. The Network Settings dialog appears.
e. In the Overview tab, select the second ethernet adapter, labeled eth1.
f. Use the tab key to select Edit and press Enter.
g. From the Network Card Setup, tab to access Statically assigned IP Address and
select using the spacebar. Use the tab key to select IP Address and enter the IP
Address, the Subnet Mask, and the host name of the proxy appliance for the
backup network.
h. Use the tab key to select Next and press Enter.
i. From Network Settings, use the tab key to select Overview. Use the right-arrow key
to select Hostname/DNS. Use the Tab key to select and then specify the following
fields:
l
Host name
l
Domain name for the production network
l
Policy for DNS configuration (use the default policy)
l
Name Server 1 for production network
l
Name Server 2 for backup network
l
Domain Search for both production and backup network
j. From Network Settings, use the tab key to select Hostname/DNS. Use the rightarrow key to select Routing, and set the Default Gateway to the gateway/address
for the production network if not already set.
k. Use the tab key to select OK and press Enter.
l. Use the tab key to select Quit and press Enter.
7. Reboot the proxy appliance. When prompted to register the appliance, register using
the IP address on the production network assigned to eth0 on your VMware Backup
appliance.
You can verify that backup traffic is outgoing by way of the second NIC on the proxy,
and incoming by way of the second NIC on the VMware Backup appliance, by
accessing the Performance Monitoring tab in the vSphere Client, if you set monitoring
to network traffic in real time.
60
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Backing up the VMware environment using NMC
After a successful OVA deployment, you can create VMware protection policies and
assign VMs, VMDKs and so on to the policies for backup and recovery using NMC. NMC is
the user interface for the NetWorker Console server.
Setting user privileges for the root user in the NetWorker server
Before you access the VMware Protection solution in NMC to create and assign policies,
you must assign the appropriate user privileges to the root user in the user group of the
NetWorker server.
Procedure
1. Run nsradmin from a Windows command line or UNIX terminal.
2. Type the following command:
create type:NSR usergroup; name:user defined user group
3. When prompted with the question "Create?", type Y, and then exit from nsradmin.
4. From NMC, navigate to NetWorker Administration > Configuration > User Groups.
5. Select the created user group for the root user and type the following in the Users
field:
username@VBA node
where username is the name of a user with root privileges.
6. Assign the following privileges in the Privileges field:
l
Monitor NetWorker
l
View Application Settings.
Accessing VMware Protection in NMC
When you connect to the NMC server, the Console window appears. To access the
VMware Protection solution in NMC:
Procedure
1. On the Enterprise tab, select the appropriate server.
2. Right-click on the server in the left pane of the Console window, and select Launch
Application. The Administration window displays.
Results
NetWorker automatically creates a default device for the VMware Backup Appliance,
based on the media type AFTD, for the VMware Backup Appliance’s internal storage. This
resource appears in the Devices window when you click the Devices tab.
You can access most of the options for the VMware Protection solution by selecting the
Configuration tab, as shown in the following figure.
Backing up the VMware environment using NMC
61
NetWorker VMware Protection
Figure 15 Configuration tab in the NMC Administration window
Three selections related to VMware Protection appear in the lower part of the left pane,
described in the following sections:
l
VMware Backup Appliance in NMC on page 62
l
VMware Protection Policies in NMC on page 65
l
VMware View in NMC on page 71
Additionally, the Monitoring tab provides the following options:
l
Starting a policy manually from the NMC Monitoring window on page 75
l
Stopping a policy from the NMC Monitoring window on page 76
l
Viewing policy progress from the NMC Monitoring window on page 76
VMware Backup Appliance in NMC
When you select VMware Backup Appliances, the available VMware Backup Appliances
appear in the right pane. From the right-pane, you can monitor the state (offline/online)
of the VMware Backup Appliance, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 16 VMware Backup Appliance health monitoring in NMC
62
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
To view more VMware Backup Appliance related properties, right-click on an appliance
resource and select Properties, or double-click on an appliance. The NSR VBA Server
Properties window displays, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 17 NSR VBA Server Properties window
NMC automatically retrieves information about the VMware Backup Appliance, including
the following details and health information:
l
vCenter host
l
Policies pushed to the VMware Backup Appliance
l
List of External proxy hosts
l
Total internal storage capacity
l
Used internal storage capacity
l
Last Validated checkpoint
l
Online/Offline
l
Configuration State and Error
In addition to the fields that NetWorker populates automatically based on the current
settings, the NSR VBA Server Properties window includes the following fields you can
edit:
l
VBA Internal Proxies — when set to Enabled (the default setting), allows for storage
on internal proxies. When set to Disabled, shuts down the internal proxies and limits
proxy availability to the external proxy, which is required for EXT4 and LVM support.
l
VBA Adhoc Backups — when set to Enabled (the default setting), allows you to run a
policy (which includes any backup and clone actions associated with the policy)
immediately from NMC or the vSphere Web Client, in addition to scheduled backups.
When set to Disabled, you can only perform adhoc backups for policies from NMC,
and the Backup Now functionality in the vSphere Web Client will not be available for
policy backups. You can, however, still initiate ad-hoc backups for individual VMs
from the vSphere Web Client by navigating to Hosts > Clusters, right-clicking the VM
and selecting Backup Now.
VMware Backup Appliance in NMC
63
NetWorker VMware Protection
l
VBA Restrict Transport Mode to Hotadd Only — when set to Enabled, NetWorker uses
only Hotadd transport mode for policy backups, and no fallback to NBD mode
(backups over IP) will occur, even if hotadd mode is not available. When set to
Disabled (the default setting), NetWorker will use hotadd mode and fallback to NBD
mode if hotadd mode is not available. The section Restrict mapping of datastores on
page 50 provides more information on transport modes.
Note
When you restrict the transport mode to Hotadd only, backups will fail for any VM that
does not meet the Hotadd criteria as outlined in the VMware knowledgebase article
2048138. When such a failure occurs, the EMC Backup and Recovery policy only
reports that the backup was “Interrupted.” The correct status displays when you run
the following command:
mccli activity show | grep Eligible
An output similar to the following displays:
9139905687058209 No Eligible Proxies 0 2014-05-03 00:24 IST 00h:00m:00s
2014-05-03 00:24 IST On-Demand Backup 0 bytes 0% VM-Local
l
64
Staging DDR pool for Disaster recovery from non-DDR devices — allows you to select a
different Data Domain pool for staging in cases where you perform a recovery from a
non-Data Domain device on a remote site and for resurrection want to use a Data
Domain device different from the one used originally for the backup. Changing the
DDR pool can be useful in situations where the original Data Domain device is no
longer available, or the original Data Domain device is in a different location than the
clone device and you do not want to impact recovery performance.
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
VMware Protection Policies in NMC
When you expand VMware Protection Policies, NMC displays the default policy, which
gets created after NetWorker registers the first VMware Backup Appliance. The following
figure displays the Default VMware Protection policy.
Figure 18 Default VMware Protection policy in NMC
NetWorker automatically applies the default VMware Protection policy to all VMware
Backup Appliances after you register the first appliance, and enables the policy to run
once every 24 hours starting at 21:00. NetWorker saves the backups created by this
policy on the internal storage of the appliance. The backup level used is determined by
the levels defined in the Default schedule, and a one month data retention policy is used.
Setup and configure policies in NMC
You may require more than one policy to back up the VMs in your environment. For
example, there may be VMs you want to protect based on retention, how many clones you
need, and so on.
To create a new protection policy:
Procedure
1. On the Configuration tab of the NMC Administration window, right-click VMware
Protection Policies in the left pane and select New, as shown in the following figure.
VMware Protection Policies in NMC
65
NetWorker VMware Protection
Figure 19 Create new policy in NMC
2. On the Definition tab of the Create VMware Policy window, type a descriptive name
for the policy, and specify a Start Time and Interval. NetWorker provides default values
in these fields. In the following figure, a policy named BackuptoDDRandClone is being
created to backup and clone VMs to a Data Domain system.
Figure 20 Create VMware policy window
Note
Autostart is enabled by default.
66
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
3. To create the VMware action (for example, action type=VMware backup), click the
New button in the VMware Actions pane. The following page displays.
Figure 21 Create VMware Action window
Four action types appear in the drop-down:
l
VBA checkpoint discover — performs a discovery of the last validated checkpoint
backup of the VMware Backup appliance. If there is no validated checkpoint
available, this action discovers the last non-validated checkpoint. This action must
occur before the VBA checkpoint backup action.
Note
Currently, the VBA checkpoint discover action cannot be specified before the
VMware backup action. The EMC NetWorker 8.2 Release Notes provide more
information about this issue (NW154275).
l
VBA checkpoint backup — performs a checkpoint backup of the VMware Backup
appliance at a scheduled time (typically once daily) to be used in case of a
disaster recovery. This action must occur after the checkpoint discover action.
Note
You can only perform a VBA checkpoint backup to a Data Domain pool.
l
VMware backup — performs a backup of the VMware Backup appliance to internal
storage or a Data Domain system. You can only perform one VMware backup
action per VMware Protection policy. The backup action must occur before clone
actions.
Note
Only backups to a Data Domain system can be cloned.
l
Clone — performs a clone of the VMware backup on a Data Domain system to any
cloning device that NetWorker supports (including Data Domain system or tape
VMware Protection Policies in NMC
67
NetWorker VMware Protection
targets). You can specify multiple clone actions. Clone actions must occur after the
VMware backup action. You can also clone a VBA checkpoint backup, but only to a
Data Domain destination pool.
Note
Cloning to tape will clone a full backup each time, even if the VMware backup is an
incremental backup. When cloning to tape, ensure that tapes contain sufficient
space for the full backup.
4. Repeat the following steps for each action type:
a. Type a name that describes the action.
b. In the Action type field, select the action type.
c. Select the type of VMware backup:
l
Select VirtualMachine to back up VMs only. This is the default selection. When
you select this backup type, VMware View will display contents down to the VM
level.
l
Select VMDK to back up individual virtual disk files, which store the contents of
the virtual machine's hard disk drive. When you select this backup type,
VMware View will display contents down to the VMDK level.
d. Choose a destination pool:
l
For VBA checkpoint backup, select the Data Domain backup pool.
l
For VMware backup actions, select Default Pool VBA Internal to backup to
internal storage, or the Data Domain backup pool to backup to a Data Domain
device.
l
For clone actions, select the pool for your created Data Domain device, or a
clone pool containing tapes for cloning to tape.
When you select the pool for the Data Domain device, the VMware backup
occurs to the Data Domain device instead of VBA internal storage. For example,
to create the BackuptoDDRandClone policy, the Data Domain device requires a
backup pool, because you cannot clone a backup to Default Pool VBA Internal.
e. Select a retention policy for Index Management, or use the default value.
f. On the Schedule tab, NetWorker uses the default VMware Incremental Forever
schedule. You can use the default schedule, select an alternate schedule from the
drop-down, or click the green + to create a new schedule or edit a schedule.
Note
The Schedule drop-down does not allow you to select schedule overrides.
Note
You must select a schedule for each clone action. If you do not specify a schedule
for a clone action, any subsequent actions in the policy will not run. When you
select a schedule for clone actions, EMC recommends a weekly or monthly
schedule, depending on your requirements, due to the time required to complete
this action. Since save sets are synthesized on the source Data Domain device
after performing an incremental backup, a scheduled clone will clone the entire
save set chain, including data from previous backups.
When you click OK to create the VMware backup action, the Create/Edit VMware
Protection Policy window displays again, with the new action in the VMware
68
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Actions pane, along with all of the policy details. You must now assign a VMware
Backup Appliance to the policy.
5. In the Create/Edit VMware Protection Policy window, select an appliance on the
VMware Backup Appliance Selection tab, as shown in the following figure, and then
click OK.
Note
If you do not select a VMware Backup Appliance for the policy, NMC displays a
warning message indicating there is no appliance attached to this policy, and asks if
you want to proceed. If this warning displays, click No, and then return to this window
to assign a VMware Backup Appliance.
Figure 22 Select a VMware Backup Appliance in the Create/Edit VMware Protection Policy
window
When you complete these steps, the following page displays, showing the completed
VMware Protection Policy and associated actions. A map also appears at the bottom
of the window displaying a visual representation of the policy and actions.
VMware Protection Policies in NMC
69
NetWorker VMware Protection
Figure 23 VMware Protection policy with associated actions
To avoid waiting until all backups complete before the clone action begins, you can
choose to make the operations concurrent, similar to NetWorker’s immediate cloning
option which allows a group to start cloning upon each save set completion.
To enable and mark actions to run concurrently with their preceding actions, open the
Create VMware Policy or Edit VMware Protection Policy window, and then select the
appropriate checkboxes under the Definition tab, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 24 Enable and mark actions concurrent in Create VMware Policy window
Once you create the policy and complete the Actions, select the VMware backup
appliance that the policy applies by selecting the VMware Backup Appliance Selection
tab, available from the Create VMware Policy or Edit VMware Protection Policy windows.
70
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
VMware View in NMC
After detecting VMware environments, the NetWorker console provides a visual
representation of these environments when you select VMware View in the left pane of
the NMC Configuration window. Using VMware View, you can also assign the policies you
created in Setup and configure policies in NMC on page 65.
The following sections describe options available in VMware View:
l
Map view of the VMware environment on page 71
l
Table view of the VMware environment on page 73
l
Assigning policies within VMware View on page 74
l
Overprotected and unprotected VMs in VMware View on page 75
l
Assigning a policy to a disconnected ESX server in VMware View on page 75
Note
After upgrading to NetWorker 8.2, VMware View may not be visible. The section Enable
VMware View in NMC after upgrading by creating a NSR Hypervisor resource on page 45
provides more information.
Map view of the VMware environment
When you expand VMware View, a hierarchical display of the VMware environment
appears. The following containers display:
l
vCenters
l
DataCenters within the vCenter
l
Clusters within the DataCenter
l
ESX servers
l
vApps
l
Resource Pools
l
Folders
Clicking on any container in the hierarchical tree provides a detailed map view of that
container and all of its children in the right pane. For example, selecting the top level
virtualization node will display a complete view of your VMware environment across all
configured vCenters, while selecting an individual ESX server or Cluster in the hierarchy
will display the resource pool — all child elements associated with that ESX server or
Cluster including VMs, VMDKs, VMware Backup Appliances, external proxies, along with
any associated VMware backup policies to the right of these containers.
Lines connect each child element to its parent, with child elements proceeding
hierarchically from left to right in the display, as shown in the following figure.
VMware View in NMC
71
NetWorker VMware Protection
Figure 25 Map view of VMware environment in NMC
You can refine items displayed in the right details pane by selecting containers in the
Virtualization node hierarchy in the left pane. For example, if an individual Cluster is
selected in the Virtualization node, only child elements associated with that Cluster
display.
Figure 26 Cluster with child elements in VMware View
You can also filter the visible items to show only protected VMs, unprotected VMs, or
overprotected VMs, by clicking the links located above the right pane, as shown in the
following figure.
72
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Figure 27 Filtering results in VMware View
Navigating within the Map view
VMware View provides several operations to facilitate navigation within the map view:
l
Zoom in/out: You can zoom in and out of the map view by selecting the zoom icons
on the map view icon bar or by clicking on the right details pane and scrolling with
the mouse wheel. You can also select an area to zoom into by selecting the Zoom
Area button, or fit the entire display into the right details pane by selecting the Fit
Content button. These operations are also available by right-clicking in the details
pane.
l
Moving the display: You can move the graphical display by left-clicking in the details
pane and dragging the mouse cursor.
l
Expanding and collapsing containers: You can expand or collapse any container in
the map view to display or hide the child elements associated with the container by
double-clicking the container.
l
Overview: You can display an overview of the map view by selecting the Overview tab
within the Overview pane. The overview of the map view is particularly useful for large
maps and allows you to quickly drill down to specific areas in the map.
l
Filter: You can limit items displayed and search for specific items in the map view by
using the Filter VM by and Show functions, available from the Filter tab within the
Overview pane.
Table view of the VMware environment
You can switch to view the VMware environment in table form, rather than map form, by
selecting the Table icon on the map view icon bar, as shown in the following figure, or by
VMware View in NMC
73
NetWorker VMware Protection
right-clicking anywhere in the details pane and selecting Table. The Table view functions
like other table views in the NetWorker Console.
Figure 28 Select Table view in VMware View
The filtering function works the same in table view as in map view. Links provided above
the details pane allow you to display only overprotected VMs, unprotected VMs, or all
VMs in the environment. The NetWorker Administration Guide provides general
information on using tables in the NetWorker Console.
Note
In table view, the Host field contains an undefined value for VMs or containers that are
part of a cluster. The map view provides a link to the cluster.
Assigning policies within VMware View
You can assign policies at any level (for example, you can assign a policy to the entire
datacenter, a cluster, a resource pool, a VM, or even a VMDK) by using VMware View.
Procedure
1. Right-click on any container, or expand the container and right-click on an element
within VMware View.
2. Select Add Policy-VBA. The available policies display, as shown in the following
figure.
74
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Figure 29 Add policy in VMware View
When you select a policy, VMware View refreshes and displays the new association.
3. To assign a policy at the VMDK level, expand a VM and highlight the VMDK(s) you
want to associate to the policy, and then right-click and select Add Policy-VBA. Ensure
that you select a policy that has been specifically configured to back up VMDKs using
the backup type option specified in the section Setup and configure policies in
NMC on page 65.
Overprotected and unprotected VMs in VMware View
NMC uses a warning icon within VMware View to show VMs that are overprotected (when
a particular VM is protected by two different policies, or two different VMware Backup
Appliances) or unprotected (when there are no policies assigned to protect a particular
VM or container).
Overprotection can only occur when you use the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface
in the vSphere Web Client and NMC to assign policies to VMs/VMDKs. When
overprotection occurs, you can remove a policy by right-clicking the object and selecting
Remove policy-VBA. When you unselect the additional policy in the resulting dialog, the
warning sign disappears.
You can use the Filter links, as shown in Figure 27 on page 73, to narrow your view to only
overprotected or only unprotected VMs.
Assigning a policy to a disconnected ESX server in VMware View
When you disconnect an ESX host from the vCenter server, the ESX is removed from the
EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the vSphere Web Client, but still appears in
VMware View. You can assign a VMware Protection policy to an ESX host that is
disconnected from the vCenter server, however, if you start the policy, the policy will
remain in “interrupted” state until you connect the disconnected ESX back to the vCenter
server and run the Policy again.
Note
Disconnecting an ESX server from its vCenter server only temporarily disconnects the
server and does not remove it. To permanently remove the ESX server from the vCenter
inventory, use the Remove command from vCenter.
Starting a policy manually from the NMC Monitoring window
You can manually start a VMware Protection policy by right-clicking the policy in the
Groups and Policies section on the Monitoring window and selecting Start. Otherwise,
wait for NetWorker to start the backup policy based on the scheduled start time.
Starting a policy manually from the NMC Monitoring window
75
NetWorker VMware Protection
Stopping a policy from the NMC Monitoring window
To cancel a policy in NMC, right-click the backup policy in the Groups and Policies section
on the NMC Monitoring window and select the Stop option.
Viewing policy progress from the NMC Monitoring window
You can view the progress of a policy in the Policy Details dialog, which appears when
you double-click the policy in the Groups and Policies section on the Monitoring window.
NetWorker displays the session progress for a policy in the All Sessions section on the
NMC Monitoring window. You can view NMC Reports for completed policies on the
Reports tab by selecting NetWorker Data Protection Policy reports.
Managing the VMware environment using the vSphere Web Client
The vSphere Web Client provides access to the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface.
The EMC Backup and Recovery user interface functions as a plug-in within the vSphere
Web Client that connects to the VMware Backup appliance, allowing you to perform
several operations including:
l
Assign VMs/VMDKs to policies created in NMC
Note
Since this same functionality, described in the section Assigning policies within
VMware View on page 74, is available within NMC, EMC recommends that you only
use NMC to assign VMs/VMDKs to policies.
l
Ad-hoc VM backups (also known as Backup Now functionality)
l
Image-level (FULLVM) recoveries
l
View reports and log files for policies run
l
Configuration options such as email notifications
The following sections provide more information about using the EMC Backup and
Recovery user interface in the vSphere Web Client:
76
l
Benefits of EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the vSphere Web Client on
page 77
l
Deduplication store benefits on page 77
l
Image-level Backup and Restore on page 78
l
Connecting to the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the vSphere Web
Client on page 78
l
Available tasks in the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface on page 80
l
Assigning VMs/VMDKs to a policy on page 85
l
Manually starting the backup policy using Backup Now on page 86
l
Stopping a policy in the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface on page 87
l
Viewing policy progress in the vSphere Web Client on page 87
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Note
You cannot use the VMware Backup appliance without a vCenter Server. In linked mode,
the appliance works only with the vCenter to which it is associated.
Benefits of EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the vSphere Web Client
The EMC Backup and Recovery user interface provides the following benefits:
l
Provides fast and efficient data protection for all of your VMs/VMDKs, even those
migrated between ESX hosts.
l
Significantly reduces disk space consumed by backup data by using patented
variable-length deduplication with every backup operation. The section
Deduplication store benefits on page 77 provides more information.
l
Reduces the cost of backing up VMs and minimizes the backup window by using
Changed Block Tracking (CBT) and VM snapshots.
l
Allows for easy backups without the need for third-party agents installed in each VM.
l
Uses a simple, straight-forward installation as an integrated component within EMC
Backup and Recovery, which is managed by a web portal.
l
Provides direct access to EMC Backup and Recovery configuration integrated into the
vSphere Web Client.
l
Protects backups with checkpoint and rollback mechanisms.
l
Provides simplified recovery of Windows and Linux files with end-user initiated file
level recoveries from a web-based interface.
Deduplication store benefits
Enterprise data is highly redundant, with identical files or data stored within and across
systems. For example, OS files or documents sent to multiple recipients. Edited files also
have tremendous redundancy with previous versions. Traditional backup methods
magnify this by storing all of the redundant data repeatedly. EMC Backup and Recovery
uses a patented deduplication technology to eliminate redundancy at both the file and
the subfile data segment level.
Variable vs. Fixed-Length Data Segments
A key factor in eliminating redundant data at a segment (or subfile) level is the method
used to determine the segment size. Snapshots and some deduplication technologies
commonly use fixed-block or fixed-length segments to determine the segment size.
Unfortunately, even small changes to a dataset, for example, inserting data at the
beginning of a file, can change all fixed-length segments in a dataset, despite the fact
that very little of the dataset has been changed. EMC Backup and Recovery uses an
intelligent variable-length method to determine the segment size, which examines the
data to determine logical boundary points and increases efficiency.
Logical Segment Determination
EMC Backup and Recovery uses a patented method to determine the segment size that
yields optimal efficiency across all systems. The algorithm analyzes the binary structure
of a data set to determine the context-dependent segment boundaries. Variable-length
segments average 24 KB in size and EMC Backup and Recovery further compresses the
segments to an average size of 12 KB.
Benefits of EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the vSphere Web Client
77
NetWorker VMware Protection
EMC Backup and Recovery works for all file types and sizes and intelligently deduplicates
the data by analyzing the binary structure within the VMDK files.
Image-level Backup and Restore
EMC Backup and Recovery creates VADP-integrated image-level backups. This integration
offloads the backup processing overhead from the VM to the EMC Backup and Recovery
appliance. The EMC Backup and Recovery appliance communicates with the vCenter
Server to make a snapshot of a VM’s .vmdk files. Deduplication takes place within the
appliance using a patented variable-length deduplication technology.
To support the large scale and continually expanding size of many environments, each
EMC Backup and Recovery appliance can simultaneously back up to eight VMs. All VMs
must belong to the vCenter that is dedicated to EMC Backup and Recovery.
To increase the efficiency of image-level backups, EMC Backup and Recovery utilizes the
VMware CBT feature. CBT enables EMC Backup and Recovery to only back up disk blocks
that have changed since the last backup. This greatly reduces the backup time of a given
VM image and provides the ability to process a large number of VMs within a particular
backup window.
By leveraging CBT during restores, EMC Backup and Recovery offers fast and efficient
recoveries when recovering VMs to their original location. During a restore process, EMC
Backup and Recovery queries VADP to determine which blocks have changed since the
last backup, and then only recovers or replaces those blocks during a recovery. This
reduces data transfer within the EMC Backup and Recovery environment during a
recovery operation and reduces the recovery time.
Additionally, EMC Backup and Recovery automatically evaluates the workload between
both restore methods (full image restore or a recovery leveraging CBT) and performs the
method that results in the fastest restore time. This is useful in scenarios where the
change rate since the last backup in a VM being restored is very high and the overhead of
a CBT analysis operation would be more costly than a direct full-image recovery.
The advantages of image-level backups are:
l
Provides full image backups of VMs, regardless of the guest operating system
l
Utilizes the efficient transport method SCSI hotadd when available and properly
licensed, which avoids copying the entire VMDK image over the network
l
Provides file-level recovery from image-level backups
l
Deduplicates within and across all .vmdk files protected by the EMC Backup and
Recovery appliance
l
Uses CBT for faster backups and recoveries
l
Eliminates the need to manage backup agents in each VM
l
Supports simultaneous backup and recovery for superior throughput
Connecting to the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the vSphere Web
Client
Procedure
1. From a web browser, open the vSphere Web Client:
https://IP_address_vCenter_Server:9443/vsphere-client/
78
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Note
If you receive an SSL certificate error in your web browser, refer to the VMware
knowledgebase article 1021514 at the following link:
http://kb.vmware.com/selfservice/microsites/search.do?
language=en_US&cmd=displayKC&externalId=1021514
2. In the Credentials window, type the vCenter user name and password for the
dedicated EMC Backup and Recovery user you created and then click Login.
3. In the vSphere Web Client, select EMC Backup and Recovery.
4. In the Welcome to EMC Backup and Recovery window, select a Backup Appliance from
the drop-down. The drop-down lists all the VMware Backup appliances registered in
the vCenter.
Each vCenter Server supports up to 10 appliances. The EBR Appliance field, as shown
in the following figure, displays the appliance names alphabetically in a drop-down
list. In the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface, the name of the active appliance
displays on the left pane, and the appliance name in the drop-down list is the first in
the list of available appliances.
Figure 30 Selecting the Backup Appliance
5. Click Connect.
Note
The maximum retry attempts for the VMware Backup appliance to connect to the
vCenter is two. Further attempts to connect to the vCenter requires restarting the EMC
Backup and Recovery server by typing the following command:
ebrserver.pl --restart.
Connecting to the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the vSphere Web Client
79
NetWorker VMware Protection
Available tasks in the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface
The EMC Backup and Recovery user interface allows you to configure and manage the
VMware Backup appliance.
When you connect to the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the vSphere Web
Client, the following page displays.
Figure 31 EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the vSphere Web Client
The EMC Backup and Recovery user interface consists of five tabs:
l
Getting Started — provides an overview of functionality within the EMC Backup and
Recovery user interface along with quick links to assign VMs to a policy and perform
restores.
l
Backup — provides a list of scheduled backup policies as well as details about each
policy created in NMC. This window enables users to add the VMs/VMDKs you want
to protect to the policies, and to run policies on demand. About the Backup Tab on
page 80 provides additional information on adding VMs to the backup policies and
starting backup policies on demand.
l
Restore — provides a list of successful backups that you can restore. About the
Restore Tab on page 81 provides additional information.
l
Reports — provides backup status reports for the VMs on the vCenter Server that you
added to the policy. About the Reports Tab on page 82 provides additional
information.
l
Configuration — displays EMC Backup and Recovery configuration information and
allows you to edit some of these settings. Also allows you to run integrity checks (for
example, checkpoint creation and validation). About the Configuration Tab on page
82 provides additional information.
The following sections describe the contents of the tabs.
About the Backup Tab
The Backup tab displays information about available backup policies in a tabular list.
Table 12 Backup tab column descriptions
80
Column
Description
Name
The name of the backup policy.
Type
The type of policy, for example, backup or clone.
State
Whether the backup policy is enabled or disabled. Disabled backup policies will
not run. Also, a “No Schedule” state displays when you disable Autostart in NMC
for a policy.
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Table 12 Backup tab column descriptions (continued)
Column
Description
Last Start
Time
The last time you started the policy.
Duration
The length of time for the last policy to complete.
Next Run
Time
The policy will run again at this scheduled time.
Success
Count
The number of VMs that were backed up successfully the last time the backup
policy ran.
This number updates after each backup. Changes to a policy between backups
will not be reflected in this number until after the policy runs again. For example,
if a backup reports that 10 VMs successfully backed up, and then you edit the
policy so that only one VM remains, this number remains at 10 until the policy
runs again and, if successful, the number changes to one.
Failure Count
The number of VMs that did not back up successfully the last time the backup
policy ran.
This number updates after each backup. Changes to a policy between backups
will not be reflected in this number until after the policy runs again. For example,
if a backup reports that 10 VMs failed to back up, and then you edit the policy so
that only one VM remains, this number remains at 10 until the policy runs again
and, if the backup fails, the number changes to one.
The following figure displays two example backup policies.
Figure 32 Backup policies in the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface
About the Restore Tab
The Restore tab displays a list of VMs that you backed up by using the VMware Backup
appliance. By navigating through the list of backups, you can select and restore specific
backups.
Over time, the information displayed on the Restore tab may become out of date. To view
the most up-to-date information on backups available for restore, click Refresh.
Available tasks in the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface
81
NetWorker VMware Protection
More information on restore is provided in the section Restoring the VMware
environment on page 87.
About the Reports Tab
The top half of the Reports tab lists information for each of the VMs associated with the
vCenter Server.
From the bottom section on the Reports tab, you can select a VM and view detailed
information about the selected client.
The left pane on the Reports tab provides links to the Event Console and the Task
Console. Clicking on these links displays the vCenter Server Event Console or Tasks
Console.
About the Configuration Tab
The Configuration tab allows you to manage the maintenance tasks for the VMware
Backup appliance. You can perform the following tasks on this tab:
l
Viewing backup appliance configuration on page 82
l
Configuring Email on page 82
l
Viewing the Log on page 84
Viewing backup appliance configuration
Backup Appliance information provides information for Backup Appliance Details, and
Backup Windows Configuration.
Backup Appliance Details include (in the following order):
l
Display name
l
Product name
l
IP Address
l
Major Version
l
Minor Version
l
Status
l
Host
l
vCenter Server
l
NetWorker Server
l
EBR backup user
l
EBR appliance time
l
Time zone
You can configure these options during the VMware Backup appliance installation. You
can also edit these options by using the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window.
Post-Installation configuration in the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window on
page 53 provides additional details.
Configuring Email
You can send SMTP email reports to specified recipients when you enable email
notification. The email includes the following information:
82
l
VMware Backup appliance status
l
Backup jobs summary
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
l
Virtual machines summary
Email configuration requires the information defined in the following table.
Table 13 Email configuration fields
Field Name
Description
Enable email
reports
Check this box to enable email reports.
Outgoing mail
server
Enter the name of the SMTP server you want to use to send email. You can
enter this name as either an IP address, a host name, or a FQDN. The
VMware Backup appliance needs to be able to resolve the name entered.
The default port for non-authenticated email servers is 25. The default port
of authenticated mail servers is 587. You can specify a different port by
appending a port number to the server name. For example, to specify the
use of port 8025 on server “emailserver” enter:
emailserver:8025
My server requires
me to log in
Check this box if your SMTP server requires authentication.
Username
Enter the user name you want to authenticate with.
Password
Enter the password associated with the username. EMC Backup and
Recovery does not validate the password.
From address
Enter the email address that sends the email report. You can only specify a
single address.
To address
Enter a comma-separated recipient list of up to 10 email addresses.
Send time
From the drop-down list, choose the time you want EMC Backup and
Recovery to email the reports.
Send days
Check the days that you want EMC Backup and Recovery to send the reports.
Report Locale
From the drop-down list, choose the locale for the email reports. en-us is the
default.
Note
EMC Backup and Recovery email notification does not support carbon copies (CCs), blind
carbon copies (BCCs), and SSL certificates.
Before you configure email notifications, ensure that the email account that sends the
email reports exists.
Procedure
1. From the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface, select the Configuration tab.
2. Select Email.
3. In the bottom right corner of the window, click the Edit button.
4. Specify the following:
a. Enable email reports
b. Outgoing mail server
Available tasks in the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface
83
NetWorker VMware Protection
c. (optional) My server requires me to log in
d. User name
e. Password
f. From address
g. To address(es)
h. Send day(s)
i. Send time
j. Report Locale
5. Click the Save button.
Results
To test your email configuration, click Send test email.
Viewing the Log
Click Log on the Configuration tab to display the user interface log for EMC Backup and
Recovery.
A high-level log details the activities initiated with the user interface and identifies some
key status items.
Click Refresh to view the latest user interface log entries.
Click Export View to save the details that display on the screen to file on the machine
where your browser runs.
Figure 33 Viewing the log on the Configuration tab
84
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Assigning VMs/VMDKs to a policy
Note
EMC recommends using NMC to assign VMs/VMDKs to a policy, as described in the
section Assigning policies within VMware View on page 74.
You can assign collections of VMs (such as all VMs in a datacenter), individual VMs, and
VMDKs to be included in a policy backup using the EMC Backup and Recovery user
interface in the vSphere Web Client. If you select an entire resource pool, host,
datacenter, or folder, any new VMs in that container are included in subsequent backups.
If you select a VM, then any disk added to the VM is included in the backup. If you move
the VM from the selected container to another unselected container, then the VM is no
longer part of the backup.
You can also manually select a VM to be backed up, which ensures that NetWorker backs
up the VM, even when you move the VM.
Note
EMC Backup and Recovery will not back up the following specialized VMs:
-VMware Backup appliances
-VMware Data Protection (VDP) Appliances
-Templates
-Secondary fault tolerant nodes
-Proxies
-Avamar Virtual Edition (AVE) Servers
The Wizard allows you to select these VMs; however, when you click Finish the Wizard
displays a warning that the job does not contain these special VMs.
Procedure
1. Select EMC Backup and Recovery in the vSphere Web Client.
2. On the Getting Started tab, select Assign Backup Policies. The Backup tab displays,
which shows the available policies in upper half of the window, and the Backup Policy
Details in the lower half.
The policy description matches the description in NMC (for example, Default). Backup
to internal disk means that any VMs you assign to this default policy will go to the
storage of the deployed VMware Backup appliance. When you perform backups to the
internal storage of a VMware Backup appliance, these details appear in NMC and as
part of the policy description in EMC Backup and Recovery in vCenter.
3. Click Edit. All the VMs in the vCenter display.
4. Use the checkboxes next to the VMs to select the VMs that you want to include in the
selected policy, as shown in the following figure, or expand the VMs to select VMDKs.
You can also select other inventory objects such as Resource Pools or Clusters in
addition to specific VMs.
Note
You can only assign VMs/VMDKs to the policies that you create in NMC.
Assigning VMs/VMDKs to a policy
85
NetWorker VMware Protection
Figure 34 Selecting VMs in EMC Backup and Recovery user interface
1. Figure 35 Selecting at VMDK level in EMC Backup and Recovery user interface
5. Click Finish. A dialog box displays to indicate that the backup policy was saved
successfully.
Results
To return at any time to the Backup Policy Details window and verify which VMs that you
selected, click Edit. This information also appears in the lower half of the window, in the
Show Items link next to the Sources field.
Manually starting the backup policy using Backup Now
You can manually start the backup policy in the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface
by selecting Backup Now in one of the following ways:
l
l
Click Backup Now on the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface’s Backup tab. Two
options display:
n
Backup all sources
n
Backup only out of date sources
Right-click individual VMs in vCenter and select Backup Now.
When you start the policy from the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the
vSphere Web Client, any clone actions associated with the policies will also run.
Note
If you disabled Backup Now functionality in the NSR VBA Server Properties window in
NMC, as described in the section VMware Backup Appliance in NMC on page 62, this will
disable Backup now for policy backups. A message displays indicating that Backup Now
is locked and not available. You can, however, still initiate ad-hoc backups for individual
VMs from the vSphere Web Client by navigating to Hosts > Clusters, right-clicking the VM
and selecting Backup Now.
86
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Otherwise, you can wait for NetWorker to start the backup policy based on the scheduled
start time.
Stopping a policy in the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface
Procedure
1. Navigate to the Backup tab.
2. Click the circular x symbol associated with the backup job in the Recent Tasks pane.
Viewing policy progress in the vSphere Web Client
To view the progress for a backup policy, select Tasks in the left pane of the vSphere Web
Client.
The Task Console displays, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 36 Viewing policy progress in the Task Console
After the backup completes, you can recover the backed up VMs in the vSphere Web
Client or perform a file-level restore by using the EMC Data Protection Restore Client.
Restoring the VMware environment
The NetWorker VMware Protection solution provides two levels of restore functionality:
l
A FULLVM (image-level) restore will restore an entire backup image or selected drives
to the original VM, another existing VM, or a new VM. These restores are less resource
intensive and are best used for restoring large amounts of data quickly.
l
File-level restores will restores specific folders or files from an image backup. These
restores are more resource intensive and are best used to restore a relatively small
amounts of data. Also, when performing any file-level restore, you cannot restore
more than 5,000 folders or files, nor can you browse more than 14,498 folders or files
in the same file-level restore operation.
The following sections describe the restore options:
l
FULLVM (Image-level) Restore on page 87
l
File-level restore on page 93
FULLVM (Image-level) Restore
When the backup completes, you can restore full VMs by selecting either of the following
options in the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface:
l
Click Restore Backup on the Getting Started tab.
l
Select the Restore tab.
Stopping a policy in the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface
87
NetWorker VMware Protection
When you select the Restore tab, available VMs for the selected appliance display.
Additionally, you can select a different appliance from the Restore points from dropdown, as described in the section Recovery from secondary storage on page 109. For
every clone, a backup is listed under the restore point.
Note
Restores from devices will be slow if resurrection is required. Resurrection is a type of
recovery in which the primary backup (or snapup) in the VMware Backup Appliance is no
longer available. Resurrection is not supported for VMDK-level backups, and you can only
perform resurrection when you associate a client with the policy. For Data Domain
devices, resurrection only occurs when restoring a cloned backup. For AFTD and tape
devices, resurrection requires a local Data Domain device on the NetWorker server.
Figure 37 Restore tab in EMC Backup and Recovery user interface
The following sections describe FULLVM restore options:
l
Performing a FULLVM restore on page 88
l
Cancelling a FULLVM restore on page 90
l
Instant access restore (for Data Domain systems only) on page 90
l
Restore from last backup on page 91
l
Direct to host recovery (Emergency Restore) on page 91
l
Restore from a secondary site on page 109
Performing a FULLVM restore
To perform a full restore:
Procedure
1. Power off each VM that you want to restore.
2. On the Restore tab, click the Restore points from drop-down to select the appliance
you want to restore from.
88
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Note
Once you perform a restore from a secondary VMware Backup appliance for a
particular VM's restore point, you can no longer use this restore point for Instant
access or VMDK level restores. You can use file-level restore or image-level restore as
an alternative to restore the data. The knowledgebase article 196887, available at
http://support.emc.com, provides more details.
3. Expand the VM that you want to restore. You can filter by using the Filter drop-down to
show a specific VM and related items. You can also browse to the VMDK level and
select a single VMDK for restore if you only want to restore that disk.
4. Select a restore point and click Restore. The Restore backup wizard launches.
5. On the Select Backup page, select the correct restore point (the wizard displays all
restore points for the backup by date and time). Typically, you only select one restore
point at a time. Click Next.
6. On the Set Restore Options page, specify where you want to restore the backup:
l
Restore to Original Location — when you select Restore to Original Location, then
the backup restores to its original location. If the VMDK file still exists at the
original location, then the restore process overwrites the file.
l
Restore to New Location — when you unselect Restore to Original Location, you
can then specify a new location (new Name, destination, and datastore) where the
VM/VMDK will be restored.
Optionally, set the VM to Power On and Reconnect NIC after the restore process
completes. Click Next.
Note
Reconnect NIC is enabled by default and greyed out. Only when you select Power
On are you given the option to unselect Reconnect NIC.
7. On the Ready to complete page, verify the selections. The wizard displays a summary
of the number of machines that will be replaced (restore to the original location) and
the number of machines that will be created (restore to a new location).
Results
To change any of the settings for your restore request, either use the Back button to
return to the appropriate screen, or click on the appropriate numbered step title to the
left of the wizard. If the settings are correct, then click Finish. If the settings are not
correct, then click Back to go back to create the correct configuration.
The Restore wizard displays a message that the restore process initiated successfully.
Click OK. You can monitor the Restore progress by using the Recent Tasks pane.
Note
If you selected Reconnect NIC during the restore process, then confirm that the network
configuration for the newly-created VM. Once the restore completes, the new VM NIC
might use the same IP address as the original VM, which will cause conflicts.
When the recovery starts, a recovery session also displays in NMC. Any activities that
occur on the vCenter side are visible on the NMC side.
FULLVM (Image-level) Restore
89
NetWorker VMware Protection
Cancelling a FULLVM restore
To cancel a restore at any time during setup, click the circular x symbol associated with
the restore job in the Recent Tasks pane.
Instant access restore (for Data Domain systems only)
If your primary backup is located on a Data Domain system, clicking the Instant Access
button, located on the Restore tab, allows you to perform a quick restore of these
backups, the same as you would perform a typical FULLVM restore. No further
configuration is required to use this feature.
When you click Instant Access, the Instant Access wizard launches and displays the
Select Backup page for selecting a backup to restore.
After selecting a backup to restore, click Next to display the Set Instant Access Options
page, where you can specify a name and destination.
Figure 38 Set Instant Access Options in the Restore a backup wizard
When you click Finish, the Data Domain system gets added as a datastore to the ESX
server, and the VM gets created within the datastore.
Instant Access restore limitations
The following limitations apply to Instant Access restore operations:
90
l
You cannot use the Instant Access button when you select more than one different
Data Domain system backup for multiple VMs.
l
Instant Access restore is restricted to one restore at a time. Ensure that you vMotion
the VM to a different datastore and that you unmount the datastore before performing
another instant access restore for the Data Domain system.
l
You cannot recover multiple save sets concurrently using Instant Access restore.
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Restore from last backup
The vSphere Web Client also provides an option to perform a VMware Backup appliance
restore from the last successful backup. This option is available when you right-click the
VM and select All EBR actions > Restore from last backup.
Note
Before using this option, ensure that you establish a connection to the VMware Backup
appliance by selecting the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the vSphere Web
Client.
Direct to host recovery (Emergency Restore)
In NetWorker 8.2 and later releases, you can recover image-level backups directly to an
ESX host without requiring a vCenter server by using the Emergency Restore tab in the
EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window, as shown in the following figure. Direct to
host recovery is available only for VMs that you back up to a VMware Backup appliance.
Before you begin
Before performing an emergency restore, ensure you meet the following requirements:
l
The VM you want to restore must have a VMware Hardware version that is supported
by the ESX host running the VMware Backup Appliance (VMware Hardware version 7
or later)
l
A vSphere host that is currently managed by the vCenter Server must be temporarily
disassociated from the vCenter Server to perform the emergency restore. To
disassociate the vCenter Server, use the vSphere Client (not the vSphere Web Client)
connected directly to the vSphere host.
l
You must have adequate free space in the target datastore to accommodate the
entire VM. The target VMFS datastore to which the VM is being restored must support
the VMDK file size
l
Network connectivity must be available for the restored VMs from the ESX host
running the VMware Backup Appliance
l
You must have at least one local account with administrator privileges on the ESX
host running the VMware Backup Appliance
Figure 39 Emergency Restore in the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window
FULLVM (Image-level) Restore
91
NetWorker VMware Protection
Procedure
1. Log in to the vSphere Client of the ESX host.
2. In the vSphere Client, right-click on the ESX host that the VMware Backup Appliance
resides on:
a. Select Disconnect.
b. Click Yes when prompted to disassociate the ESX host from its vCenter.
3. Log in to the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window at https://
<IP_address_VMware_Backup_Appliance>:8543/ebr-configure/.
4. In the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window, select the Emergency Restore tab
The Emergency Restore dialog box lists VMs protected by the VMware Backup
Appliance. Click Refresh to view the most recent available VM backups. Highlight a
VM and click the down arrow to view the date and time of previous backups.
5. Select the VM that will serve as the restore point and click Restore.
The Host Credentials dialog box displays.
6. In the Host Credentials dialog box, enter the valid ESX host credentials for the
following fields:
a. ESXi hostname or IP address – enter the host name or IP address of the ESXi
hosting the VMware Backup Appliance
b. Port – pre-populated with the default port, 443
c. Username – enter the username for ESX host. The recommended host username is
root. For any other host username, you must assign the Create VM privilege to the
user account
d. Password – enter the password for the ESX host.
7. Click OK to continue.
The Restore a Backup dialog box displays.
8. Enter a new name in the New Name field. The name must be unique and can be up to
255 characters long.
Note
The following characters cannot be used in the name: ~ ! @ $ ^ % { } [ ] | , ` ; # \ / : * ?
< > & . In addition, diacritical characters cannot be used (for example: â, é, ì, ü, and ñ).
9. Select a datastore as the destination target for the backup.
CAUTION
The datastore capacity size is listed. Make sure you select a datastore with enough
disk space to accommodate the restore. Insufficient space causes the restore to fail.
10.Click Restore.
11.In the vSphere Client, right-click on the ESX host that the VMware Backup Appliance
resides on:
a. Select Connect.
b. Click Yes when prompted to associate the ESX host back with its vCenter.
92
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
12.Verify that the restore was initiated successfully by checking the progress in the
Recent Tasks window in the vSphere Web Client.
Note
The restored VM is listed at the vSphere host level in the inventory. Restoring to a
more specific inventory path is not supported.
Emergency Restore limitations and unsupported features
The following limitations apply to emergency restore operations performed from the EMC
Backup and Recovery Configure window.
l
You cannot perform an emergency restore from a cloned backup; the backup you
select for restore must be the primary backup.
l
The vSphere host on which the emergency restore operation is being performed
cannot be part of the vCenter inventory.
l
Emergency restore allows you to restore only to the root of the host level in the
inventory.
l
Emergency restore requires that the DNS server used by EMC Backup and Recovery is
available and can fully resolve the target vSphere host name.
l
Emergency restore will restore the VM in Powered Off state. You must manually log in
to the host and power on the restored VM.
l
Emergency restore will restore the VM as a new VM. You must ensure that the name
provided for the VM is not a duplicate of a VM that already exists.
l
Emergency restore does not list MSapp clients.
l
An internal proxy is automatically activated when an emergency restore operation is
performed. If both the internal and external proxies are activated, you must disable
the internal proxy in the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window for the
emergency restore to complete successfully.
File-level restore
Use the EMC Data Protection Restore Client interface to perform file-level restore (FLR).
The following sections provide information about FLR:
l
Restoring specific folders or files to the original VM on page 93
l
Restoring specific folders or files from a different VM on page 96
l
FLR limitations on page 96
Note
Before you start a file-level restore, review the limitations specified in the section FLR
limitations on page 96 to ensure that you can perform FLR in your configuration.
Restoring specific folders or files to the original VM
This topic describes what occurs when you restore specific folders and files to the
original VM on Windows and Linux VMs.
Procedure
1. Open a browser and enter a URL that points to the VMware Backup appliance and
indicates file-level restore, as in the following example:
http://VMware_Backup_appliance_host:8580/flr
File-level restore
93
NetWorker VMware Protection
Figure 40 EMC Data Protection Restore Client login page
Note
The browser must point to a VMware Backup appliance from the VM that is being
restored using FLR, and you must be part of the Administrators group to perform FLR
restore.
2. When you log in, the Manage Mounted Backups dialog displays, as shown in the
following figure. Click Mount to mount a restore point.
Figure 41 Manage Mounted Backups in EMC Data Protection Restore Client
Note
When you click Mount, if a folder hierarchy does not appear, the file system in use on
the VM may not be supported. The section FLR limitations on page 96 provides more
information.
94
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
3. Browse the files and select files to recover, then click Restore selected files.
Figure 42 Browse and select files to recover
4. In the Select Destination window, select the folder to which you want to restore the
VM, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 43 Select Destination window
5. Click Restore to start the recovery.
File-level restore
95
NetWorker VMware Protection
Restoring specific folders or files from a different VM
To restore specific folders or files from a different VM, use the Advanced login in the EMC
Data Protection Restore Client login screen. The EMC Data Protection Restore Client help
provides more information about the Advanced login.
Note
When using the Advanced login, ensure that you launch the EMC Data Protection Restore
Client from a VM that has been backed up using the same VMware Backup appliance,
and that the user you specify for the vCenter login has the necessary permissions to
perform FLR restore. These permissions are typically the same as the user role specified
in the section Creating a dedicated vCenter user account and EMC Backup and Recovery
role on page 45.
FLR limitations
The following limitations apply to file-level restores:
96
l
EMC Backup and Recovery does not support restoring specific folders or files to a
different VM.
l
You must install VMware Tools to use FLR. For best results, ensure that all VMs run
the latest available version of VMware Tools. Older versions are known to cause
failures when browsing during the file-level restore operation.
l
All VMs must belong to the vCenter dedicated to EMC Backup and Recovery. Multiple
vCenters are not supported.
l
FLR does not support the following virtual disk configurations:
n
Unformatted disks
n
Dynamic disks
n
FAT16 file systems
n
FAT32 file systems
n
Extended partitions (Types: 05h, 0Fh, 85h, C5h, D5h)
n
Two or more virtual disks mapped to single partition
n
Encrypted partitions
n
Compressed partitions
n
XFS
l
FLR of ext4 or GPT file systems is supported only with external proxies. To perform FLR
of ext4 or GPT file systems, you must disable the internal proxies from the NSR VBA
Server Properties window in NMC, as described in the section VMware Backup
Appliance in NMC on page 62.
l
FLR does not support direct restore from a cloned backup. To recover individual files
from a clone, you must first perform an image-level recovery of the clone. This creates
a primary copy on the EMC Backup and Recovery appliance, from which you can then
perform FLR.
l
FLR does not restore ACLs.
l
FLR does not restore or browse symbolic links.
l
FLR cannot restore more than 5,000 folders or files in the same file-level restore
operation.
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
l
FLR cannot browse more than 14,498 folders or files in the same file-level restore
operation.
l
When you create partitions, fill the lower ordered indices first. That is, you cannot
create a single partition and place it in the partition index 2, 3, or 4. You must place
the single partition in partition index 1.
l
FLR of Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012 VMs does not support the following file
systems:
n
Deduplicated NTFS
n
Resilient File System (ReFS)
n
EFI bootloader
Monitoring VMware Backup Appliance activity
You can monitor VMware Backup Appliance activities from the EMC Backup and Recovery
user interface in the vSphere Web Client, or from NMC.
Most VMware Backup Appliance tasks, events, and alarms are prefaced by “EBR:”, for
EMC Backup and Recovery. Note that some of the tasks and events that occur as part of
EMC Backup and Recovery processes are performed by the vCenter Server and do not
have this prefix.
For example, running a VMware Backup Appliance scheduled backup job against a
running VM creates the following task entries:
l
Create a VM snapshot (vCenter acting on the VM to be backed up).
l
EMC Backup and Recovery: Scheduled Backup Job (EMC Backup and Recovery
starting the backup job).
l
Reconfigure the VM (the VMware Backup appliance requesting services from virtual
center).
l
Remove snapshot (virtual center acting on the VM that has completed backing up).
To see only EMC Backup and Recovery-generated tasks or events in the Tasks or Event
console, click Event in the left pane of the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the
vSphere Web Client, and enter EMC Backup and Recovery: in the Filter field.
Viewing Recent Tasks in the vSphere Web Client
The EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the vSphere Web Client displays task
entries in the Recent Tasks window when you perform the following operations:
l
Backups
l
Restores
l
Integrity Checks
Click on a task entry in the Recent Tasks window to display task details in the pane at the
bottom of the window. You can also display task details by clicking the link next to the
VM icon on the Running tab in the Recent Tasks section.
To cancel tasks from the Running tasks pane, click the Delete icon.
Monitoring VMware Backup Appliance activity
97
NetWorker VMware Protection
Viewing Alarms
EMC Backup and Recovery can trigger the following alarms:
Table 14 EMC Backup and Recovery alarms
Alarm Name
Alarm Description
EBR: [001] The most recent
checkpoint for the VMware
Backup appliance is outdated.
From the Configuration tab of the EMC Backup and Recovery
user interface, click the All Actions icon and select Run integrity
check.
EBR: [002] The VMware Backup
appliance is nearly full.
The VMware Backup appliance is nearly out of space for
additional backups. You can free space on the appliance by
manually deleting unnecessary or older backups and by
changing retention policies on backup jobs to shorten the time
that backups are retained.
EBR: [003] The VMware Backup
appliance is full.
The VMware Backup appliance has no more space for
additional backups. The appliance will run in read-only (or
restore-only) mode until additional space is made available.
You can free space on the appliance by manually deleting
unnecessary or older backups and by changing retention
policies on backup jobs to shorten the time that backups are
retained.
EBR: [004] The VMware Backup
appliance datastore is
approaching maximum
capacity.
The datastore where the VMware Backup appliance
provisioned its disks is approaching maximum capacity. When
the maximum capacity of the datastore is reached, the VMware
Backup appliance will be suspended. The appliance cannot be
resumed until additional space is made available on the
datastore.
EBR: [005] Core services are not
running.
Start Core services using the EMC Backup and Recovery
Configure window.
EBR: [006] Management
services are not running.
Start Management services using the EMC Backup and
Recovery Configure window.
EBR: [007] File system services
are not running.
Start File system services using the EMC Backup and Recovery
Configure window.
EBR: [008] File level restore
services are not running.
Start File level restore services using the EMC Backup and
Recovery Configure window.
EBR: [009] Maintenance
services are not running.
Start Maintenance services using the EMC Backup and
Recovery Configure window.
EBR: [010] Backup scheduler is
not running.
Start Backup scheduler using the EMC Backup and Recovery
Configure window.
Viewing the Event Console
EMC Backup and Recovery can generate info, error, and warning events. For example:
98
l
Info— “EMC Backup and Recovery: Critical VMs Backup Job created.”
l
Warning— “EMC Backup and Recovery: Unable to add Host123 client to backup job
Critical VMs because . . .”
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
l
Error— “EMC Backup and Recovery: Appliance has changed from Full Access to Read
Only.”
EMC Backup and Recovery generates events on all state changes in the appliance. As a
general rule, state changes that degrade the capabilities of the appliance are labeled
errors, and state changes that improve the capabilities are labeled informational. For
example, when starting an integrity check, EMC Backup and Recovery generates an event
that is labeled an error because the appliance is set to read-only before performing the
integrity check. After the integrity check, EMC Backup and Recovery generates an
informational event because the appliance changes from read-only to full access.
Selecting an event entry displays details of that event, which includes a link to Show
related events.
Monitoring VMware Backup Appliance events from NMC
You can also monitor VMware Backup Appliance events, such as system errors, from the
NMC Enterprise window.
Procedure
1. Log in to NMC.
The NMC Enterprise window displays.
2. Right-click Enterprise from the left navigation tree and select New > Host.
3. Enter the VMware Backup Appliance hostname or IP and click Next.
The Select Host Type dialog displays.
4. Select Avamar and click Next, and then click Finish.
Results
Other options for monitoring sessions
In addition to using the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the vSphere Web
Client to monitor recent tasks, you can use the following options to monitor sessions:
l
In the vSphere Client, go to Administration and then select Sessions
l
Open a web browser and enter https://<vcenter-IP>/mob/?moid=SessionManager
l
Use proxycp by running java -jar proxycp.jar --listvcsessions
l
Use the vSphere PowerCLI script.
Example 2 Using the vSphere PowerCLI script to monitor sessions
Monitoring VMware Backup Appliance events from NMC
99
NetWorker VMware Protection
Example 2 Using the vSphere PowerCLI script to monitor sessions (continued)
Figure 44 vSphere PowerCLI example output
Shutdown and Startup Procedures
If you need to shut down the VMware Backup appliance, use the Shut Down Guest OS
action. This action automatically performs a clean shutdown of the appliance. If the
appliance is powered off without the Shut Down Guest OS action, corruption might occur.
It can take up to 30 minutes to shut down and restart the VMware Backup appliance. You
can monitor the status through the EMC Backup and Recovery Console in the vSphere
Client. After vSphere shuts down the appliance, use Power On to restart the appliance.
If the appliance does not shutdown properly, then rollback to the last validated
checkpoint occurs during the restart. This means that any changes to backup policies or
backups that occur between the checkpoint and the unexpected shutdown will be lost.
This is expected behavior and is used to ensure system corruption does not occur from
unexpected shutdowns.
The VMware Backup appliance is designed to be run 24x7 to support maintenance
operations and to be available for restore operations. It should not be shutdown unless
there is a specific reason for shutdown.
EMC Backup and Recovery Capacity Management
This section focuses on EMC Backup and Recovery capacity management and includes
the following topics:
l
Impact of Selecting Thin or Thick Provisioned Disks on page 100
l
Save set lifecycle on page 101
Impact of Selecting Thin or Thick Provisioned Disks
This section describes the advantages and disadvantages of selecting a thin or thick disk
partitioning for the EMC Backup and Recovery datastore.
Thin provisioning uses virtualization technology to allow the appearance of more disk
resources than what might be physically available. Use thin provisioning when an
administrator actively monitors disk space and can allocate additional physical disk
space as the thin disk grows. If you do not monitor and manage disk space and the EMC
Backup and Recovery datastore is on a thin provisioned disk that cannot allocate space,
the VMware Backup appliance fails. When this occurs, you can rollback to a validated
checkpoint. Any backups and configuration changes that occurred after the checkpoint
will be lost.
100
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Thick provisioning allocates all of the required storage when the disk is created. The best
practice for the EMC Backup and Recovery datastore is to create a thin provisioned disk
when the EMC Backup and Recovery appliance is deployed (this allows for rapid
deployment), and then convert the disk from thin provisioning to thick provisioning after
deployment.
Note
See the VMware documentation for details on inflating thin provisioned disks to thick
provisioned disks. This procedure requires that you shut down the VMware Backup
appliance. This may take several hours to complete.
Save set lifecycle
The NetWorker server exclusively manages the lifecycle of save sets created by VMware
Backup appliance nodes.
Deletion and expiration of save sets and metadata
The following sections describe deletion and expiration of save sets and metadata.
Expiring save sets from NetWorker
NetWorker manages the retention period for EMC Backup and Recovery appliance
(VMware Backup appliance) backups. When a save set in the appliance expires in
NetWorker, NetWorker deletes the corresponding backup from the appliance’s storage.
Manual deletion of save sets from NetWorker
Delete EMC Backup and Recovery appliance backups from NetWorker by using the nsrmm
command:
nsrmm -d -S ssid/cloneid
When you delete a backup from NetWorker, the corresponding backup will also be
deleted from the EMC Backup and Recovery appliance.
Data Domain backup
If a Data Domain backup has multiple clones, then deleting the primary clone only
deletes the copy on the EMC Backup and Recovery appliance.
Deleting a volume
You can delete a default VMware Backup appliance volume or user-defined Data Domain
device volume that contains VMware Backup appliance backups after you unmount the
devices. If the backups cannot be deleted from the VMware Backup appliance, then the
volume deletion operation fails.
Volume relabeling
You can relabel a default VMware Backup appliance volume or user-defined Data Domain
volume that the VMware Backup appliance uses in the same method as any other
volume. The relabel operation deletes all the VMware Backup Appliance backups that
belong to the volume associated with the device from both NetWorker and the VMware
Backup Appliance server. If the backups cannot be deleted from the VMware Backup
Appliance, then the device relabel operation fails.
Save set lifecycle
101
NetWorker VMware Protection
Checkpoints and VMware Backup appliance rollback
The maintenance services for EMC Backup and Recovery start between 24 to 48 hours
after booting up, and maintenance services are responsible for creating checkpoints. A
checkpoint is initiated within the vSphere Web Client and captures a point in time
snapshot of the VMware Backup appliance for disaster recovery purposes. In the event
you need to recover the VMware Backup appliance, a rollback setting within the EMC
Backup and Recovery Configure window allows the VMware administrator to
automatically roll back to the last validated checkpoint.
By default, Checkpoints are automatically scheduled during the maintenance window. In
addition to the twice daily checkpoints, you can also create and validate additional EMC
Backup and Recovery server checkpoints at any time.
Checkpoint validation might take several hours, depending on the amount of data in the
NetWorker server. For this reason, you can configure each validation operation
individually to perform all checks (full validation) or perform a partial “rolling” check,
which fully validates all new and modified stripes, then partially checks a subset of
unmodified stripes. You can also delete checkpoints to reclaim server storage capacity.
Creating a checkpoint using the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface
You can create a validated checkpoint by using the command line or the EMC Backup and
Recovery user interface in the vSphere Web Client. The section Preparing the VMware
Backup appliance for disaster recovery on page 106 provides information on creating
and validating checkpoints from the command line.
Procedure
1. Navigate to the Configuration tab.
2. Select the Run integrity Check option, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 45 Run Integrity Check button in EMC Backup and Recovery user interface
Rolling back to a checkpoint
Rollback is a setting in the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window that allows you
to automatically roll back to the last validated checkpoint when performing a disaster
recovery.
Procedure
1. Log in to the appliance at http://VMware Backup appliance FQDN:8580/ebr-configure
and navigate to the Rollback tab.
102
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
2. Select Unlock to enable EMC Backup and Recovery rollback.
3. When prompted, specify the appliance password, then click OK.
4. Select a validated checkpoint, then click the Perform EBR rollback to selected
checkpoint button.
Figure 46 Roll back in EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window
Note
NetWorker does not support disaster recovery from a checkpoint backup that was
taken using an OVA earlier than the currently installed version. For example, if you
upgrade to a NetWorker 8.2 server and OVA 1.1.09.147 from NetWorker 8.1 SP1 and
OVA 1.0.1.9, you cannot perform a disaster recovery from a checkpoint backup
created with OVA 1.0.1.9. Backup and restore operations will hang in "Waiting:
Queued" state.
5. In the EBR Rollback window, click OK.
Protecting checkpoints for the VMware Backup appliance
In order to provide complete protection for the VMware Backup appliance, EMC
recommends that you protect the checkpoints that you perform and store on the
appliance.
You can accomplish this by adding VBA checkpoint discover and VBA checkpoint backup
actions to a policy, as described in the section Setup and configure policies in NMC on
page 65.
You should run backups once or twice daily, occurring a couple hours after the
checkpoint gets created, to secure the checkpoint files to NetWorker media. Preparing
the VMware Backup appliance for disaster recovery on page 106 provides a list of
checkpoint locations.
Cross Sync
A Cross sync operation synchronizes the VMware Backup appliance and NetWorker
databases for backups, triggered automatically upon VMware Backup appliance rollback.
You can also perform cross sync manually from the command line to check the
Protecting checkpoints for the VMware Backup appliance
103
NetWorker VMware Protection
consistency of the NetWorker metadata. Before you perform a cross sync, ensure that the
VMware Backup appliance is online.
Note
After running the scanner command to recover the media database, you must manually
perform a cross sync in order to cross sync with the VMware Backup appliances and set
primary clone IDs correctly.
Use the following command to manually perform cross sync from the command line of the
NetWorker server:
nsrim -X -S -h EMC_Backup_and_Recovery_appliance_hostname -t last
checkpoint time -f
where:
l
-S initiates the VMware Backup appliance cross sync
l
-h specifies the VMware Backup appliance server name
l
-t is an optional parameter that specifies the last checkpoint time. EMC Backup and
Recovery performs cross sync for the backups that occur only after the specified time.
Specify the time in a format that NetWorker accepts. The nsr_getdate man page
provides information on acceptable formats.
l
-f synchronizes the entire database and deletes out of sync backups. If the backups
exist only on the VMware Backup appliance, then you can only delete the backups by
using this option.
To cross sync the entire database, specify -f without specifying the time.
If you do not specify a time when you perform a manual cross sync, NetWorker retrieves
the most recent validated checkpoint from the VMware Backup appliance and performs a
cross-sync starting from that time.
If you perform cross sync on an entire database where the database is very large, it may
take longer than normal to synchronize.
Cross sync generates the following events in NMC:
l
“Cross sync with appliance name VMware Backup Appliance is started.”
l
“Cross sync with appliance name VMware Backups Appliance is successful for
configuration and backups.”
Decommissioning the VMware Backup Appliance
NOTICE
Use caution when you completely remove references of a VMware Backup Appliance from
the NetWorker Server as this erases all the backups, clones, and configuration
information.
The decommissioning process deletes all backup metadata on the appliance node, if the
operation is successful. If an error occurs, you will be provided with one of the following
options:
l
Abort the decommission.
l
Continue without further contact with the VMware Backup Appliance, and
decommission the appliance only from NetWorker.
If you confirm to continue decommission, this will:
104
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
l
Remove all the save sets/clones from their respective volumes and the media
database.
l
Delete the NSR Client resource associated with the VMware Backup Appliance.
l
Delete the NSR VMware Backup Appliance Server RAP resource.
l
Remove the VMware Backup Appliance entry from all policies referencing it.
WARNING
You should only decommission a VMware Backup Appliance node with EMC NetWorker
Support's guidance. The knowledgebase article 204064, available at http://
support.emc.com, provides more information.
Disaster Recovery to the same vCenter
NetWorker VMware Protection is robust in its ability to store and manage backups. In the
event of a failure where you need to perform a disaster recovery to the same vCenter, as a
first course of action rollback to a known validated checkpoint. To recover from a VMware
Backup appliance failure, refer to the following disaster recovery guidelines.
Note
NetWorker VMware Protection does not support a disaster recovery of data backed up to
Avamar storage when the internal AFTD metadata is lost.
Disaster Recovery Guidelines
Review these guidelines before performing a disaster recovery:
1. When setting save set browse and retention policies, ensure that the save sets in the
media database are active and not expired and recycled.
2. Ensure that the checkpoint backup you plan to use was taken using the same version
OVA as the currently installed version. NetWorker does not support disaster recovery
from a checkpoint backup that was taken using a previously installed OVA. For
example, if you upgrade to a NetWorker 8.2 server and OVA 1.1.09.147 from
NetWorker 8.1 SP1 and OVA 1.0.1.9, you cannot perform a disaster recovery from a
checkpoint backup created with OVA 1.0.1.9. Backup and restore operations will
hang in "Waiting: Queued" state.
3. Before shutting down the VMware Backup appliance, verify that no backup or
maintenance tasks are running. Depending on the backup method used and how
long it takes, schedule your backup during a time where no tasks are scheduled. For
example, if your backup window is eight hours and backups only take one hour to
complete, you have an additional seven hours before maintenance tasks are
schedule. This is an ideal time to shut down and backup the appliance.
4. In the vSphere Client, navigate to the appliance. Perform a Shut Down Guest OS on
the VM. Do not use Power Off. A power off task is equivalent to pulling the plug on a
physical server and may not result in a clean shut down process. Shutdown and
Startup Procedures on page 100 provides more information.
Disaster Recovery to the same vCenter
105
NetWorker VMware Protection
Preparing the VMware Backup appliance for disaster recovery
Perform the following steps to prepare for a disaster recovery of the VMware Backup
appliance:
Note
When you use ssh to connect or login to the EMC Backup and Recovery console, ensure
that you login as admin instead of root. The section Log in to the EMC Backup and
Recovery Console as admin instead of root on page 123 provides more information.
Procedure
1. If you do not have a recent checkpoint or want to create a new checkpoint backup,
create the checkpoint by running the following command:
# mccli checkpoint create --override_maintenance_scheduler
2. Verify that you have created a successful checkpoint by running:
# mccli checkpoint show
An output similar to the following displays:
Tag
Time
Validated Deletable
----------------- ----------------------- --------- --------cp.20130206170045 2013-02-06 09:00:45 PST Validated Yes
3. Validate the checkpoint by running:
# mccli checkpoint validate --cptag=cp.20130206170045 -override_maintenance_scheduler
Validation takes some time to complete. Keep checking the status by running mccli
checkpoint show.
4. Add two actions for the VMware Protection Policy within NMC, in the following order:
a. VMware checkpoint discover action.
b. VMware checkpoint backup action.
Note
You can only perform a checkpoint backup to a Data Domain pool. The section
Setup and configure policies in NMC on page 65 provides more information about
configuring a policy with VMware Actions in NMC.
Optionally, you can add a clone action after the checkpoint backup action to clone
the checkpoint backup to a Data Domain system, AFTD, or tape.
5. Start or schedule the policy.
106
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Note
Although the 0.5TB appliance contains 3 * 256 GB disks and the 4TB appliance
contains 6 * 1TB disks, only one checkpoint save set gets created on NetWorker for all
the disks. Ensure that you know which VMware Backup appliance (0.5 or 4TB) you
deployed before performing disaster recovery. This information is not required when
performing the checkpoint backup, but it will be required during re-deployment of the
appliance as part of the disaster recovery.
To help identify the deployed appliance and verify the checkpoint backup, you can
view log messages within NMC’s daemon log file, and within the policy logs (located
in /nsr/logs/policy).
Performing a disaster recovery of the VMware Backup appliance
Note
For any disaster recovery, you must repeat any changes previously made to the
configuration files (for example, the changes performed in the section Restrict mapping
of datastores on page 50).
Procedure
1. Redeploy the VMware Backup appliance with the same network configuration, and
use the Override button within the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window.
Note
Ensure that the password for the system you plan to recover to matches the password
for the system that the checkpoint was taken from.
2. Re-register the proxies with the redeployed VMware Backup appliance by running the
following command from each external proxy, or reboot the external proxy:
#/usr/local/avamarclient/etc/initproxyappliance.sh start
3. Navigate to the Configuration tab in NMC and highlight VMware Backup Appliance in
the lower left pane.
4. In the right pane, right-click the VMware Backup Appliance and select Start VBA
Recover for Checkpoints, as shown in the following figure. A list of checkpoint
backups display.
Performing a disaster recovery of the VMware Backup appliance
107
NetWorker VMware Protection
Figure 47 Start VBA Recover for Checkpoints in NMC
5. Select the checkpoint backup you want to rollback to, then click OK. After clicking OK,
the following events occur:
a. The status of the VMware Backup Appliance changes to recover pending, and the
recovery takes 10-15 minutes to complete.
b. Upon successful recovery, the status of the VMware Backup Appliance changes to
query pending.
c. After 10 minutes, Cross sync generates the following events in NMC:
Cross sync with appliance name VMware Backup Appliance is
started.
Cross sync with appliance name VMware Backups Appliance is
successful for configuration and backups.
Note
When you perform a disaster recovery after upgrading from a NetWorker 8.2 SP1
VMware Backup appliance to a NetWorker 8.2 SP2 version, you may be required to
perform cross-sync manually. If cross-sync does not occur automatically, you can
start the operation by running the command nsrim -X -S -h VMware Backup
appliance IP on the NetWorker server. .
d. The status of the VMware Backup Appliances changes to Success.
6. Check for restores of old backups and that the policies are intact as per the
checkpoint.
Complete disaster recovery of the VMware Backup appliance and the Data Domain
or tape device
The following section describes the steps required for a complete disaster recovery,
where you need to restore both the connection to the VMware Backup appliance, and the
device (Data Domain or tape device) that has completely failed:
108
l
Prerequisites for performing a complete disaster recovery on page 109
l
Performing a complete disaster recovery on page 109
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Prerequisites for performing a complete disaster recovery
You can only run a complete disaster recovery after performing the following
prerequisites:
l
Create regular checkpoint backups of the VMware Backup appliance, as described in
the section Preparing the VMware Backup appliance for disaster recovery on page
106.
l
Clone the backups to a secondary Data Domain and/or tape device.
Performing a complete disaster recovery
Perform the following steps if a complete disaster recovery of the VMware Backup
appliance is required:
Procedure
1. Redeploy the VMware Backup appliance with the same network configuration, and
use the Override button within the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window.
Note
Ensure that the password for the system you plan to recover to matches the password
for the system that the checkpoint was taken from.
2. Re-register the proxies with the redeployed VMware Backup appliance by running the
following command from each external proxy, or reboot the external proxy:
#/usr/local/avamarclient/etc/initproxyappliance.sh start
3. Navigate to the Configuration tab in NMC and highlight VMware Backup Appliance in
the lower left pane.
4. In the right pane, right-click the VMware Backup Appliance and select Start VBA
Recover for Checkpoints, as shown in Figure 47 on page 108. A list of checkpoint
backups display.
5. Select the checkpoint backup you want to rollback to, then click OK.
6. Unmount the volumes pointing to the primary Data Domain device that has failed.
Results
After performing these steps, you can now replace the primary Data Domain device and
either configure NetWorker Data Domain Boost devices the same way you set up the
devices prior to the failure, or create new Data Domain Boost devices and adapt your
VMware policy and pools accordingly.
Recovery from a secondary site
Starting in NetWorker 8.2 SP1, when you clone a VM or VMDK backup to a secondary site
with its own vCenter and VMware Backup appliance, and the secondary site shares the
same NetWorker server as the primary site, you can recover data from the secondary site.
This procedure is particularly useful to recover data to a different vCenter when the
primary site becomes unavailable, or when restoring backups on the same vCenter using
a different VMware Backup appliance.
To select this option:
1. Navigate to the Restore tab of the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the
vSphere Web Client.
Recovery from a secondary site
109
NetWorker VMware Protection
2. From the Restore points from field, select the VMware Backup appliance that
contains the required backup(s). The Appliance Credentials dialog displays.
3. Provide the credentials for the VMware Backup appliance, and then click OK.
Figure 48 Recovery from a secondary site in the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface
4. Browse restores from the VMware Backup appliance and select the VMs/VMDKs you
want to restore to the new location, as specified in the section Performing a FULLVM
restore on page 88. Restore to the original location, Instant Access Restore and
restore from GSAN will be disabled.
Best practices and troubleshooting
This section provides best practices and troubleshooting information for the NetWorker
VMware Protection solution.
Performance and scalability
Performance and scalability of the NetWorker VMware Protection solution depends on
several factors, including which VMware Backup appliance you deploy, the number of
vCenters and number of proxies, and whether you perform a large number of concurrent
VM backups. The following table provides these scalability factors.
Table 15 Scalability Factors
Component
Recommended
count
VMs per VMware
Backup appliance
(internal storage)
Up to 48 VMs
VMs per VMware
800-1000 VMs
Backup appliance
(Data Domain backup,
no external proxy)
110
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
Notes
Given an average size of 20-30 GB per VM, the 0.5
TB OVA can accommodate a maximum of
800-1000 VMs when backing up to a Data Domain
device. One VMware Backup appliance can run 8
sessions in parallel. Considering the VM size and
data change rate, a VMware Backup appliance can
NetWorker VMware Protection
Table 15 Scalability Factors (continued)
Component
Recommended
count
Notes
complete a backup of 800-1000 VMs within 24
hours.
VMs per VMware
Backup appliance
(Data Domain backup
+ 5 external proxies,
48 concurrent
sessions
VMware Backup appliance + 5 external proxies
can backup 1000 VMs in approximately 8 hours.
VMware Backup
appliance per vCenter
3 or lower
Better performance is observed with a single
vCenter processing 48 concurrent sessions, so
when performing backups from multiple VMware
Backup appliances, EMC recommends staggering
the backup to reduce the load on vCenter.
Proxies per vCenter
5
Each VMware Backup appliance has 8 internal
proxies, and the external proxy adds 8 more
concurrent sessions. Therefore, use 1 VMware
Backup appliance and 5 external proxies.
Note
EMC recommends disabling the internal proxy for
the VMware Backup Appliance if backing up more
than 100 VMs.
VMs per policy
200 or lower
A single policy can scale up to 200 VMs. If more
than 48 VMs per policy, the remaining VMs will be
queued during backup.
VMs per restore
16
More than 16 VMs may result in NBD based
restore due to VMware API limitations.
Files/directories per
FLR
Maximum of 5000
FLR restore may be significantly impacted when
there are more than 5000 files to be restored.
A VMware Backup appliance can backup up to 8 VMs in parallel. If you want to run up to
48 VM backups in parallel, then add up to 5 external proxies. Each external proxy can
backup up to 8 VMs.
To achieve the best concurrent backup performance in a setup that requires additional
vCenters, VMware Backup appliances or proxies, EMC recommends using 1 VMware
Backup appliance + 5 External proxies per vCenter. The following tables provide
information on expected performance for different setups.
Table 16 Maximum concurrent sessions per VMware Backup Appliance
Deployed per vCenter
Maximum concurrent sessions
1 VMware Backup Appliance
8
1 VMware Backup Appliance (internal storage disabled)
+ 1 External Proxy
8
Performance and scalability
111
NetWorker VMware Protection
Table 16 Maximum concurrent sessions per VMware Backup Appliance (continued)
Deployed per vCenter
Maximum concurrent sessions
1 VMware Backup Appliance (internal storage disabled)
+ 2 External proxies
16
1 VMware Backup Appliance (internal storage disabled)
+ 3 External proxies
24
1 VMware Backup Appliance (internal storage disabled)
+ 4 External proxies
32
1 VMware Backup Appliance (internal storage disabled)
+ 5 External proxies
40
2 VMware Backup Appliance (internal storage disabled)
+1 External proxy
16
Backups from the VMware Backup Appliance and external proxy create sessions with
NetWorker devices. The count of sessions is driven by the number of appliances, external
proxies, clone jobs and other backups running through this server. Every VMware Backup
Appliance and external proxy can run up to 8 sessions. If using external proxies, EMC
recommends disabling the internal proxy on the VMware Backup Appliance. The values
calculated in the table above reflect a disabled internal storage.
Table 17 Concurrency/parallelism recommendations
112
Component
Concurrency
count
Notes
Proxies per
vCenter
5
vCenter with the default configuration achieves good
performance with 50 concurrent sessions. Each VMware
Backup appliance has 8 internal proxies, and the
external proxy adds 8 more concurrent sessions.
Therefore, use 1 VMware Backup appliance and 5
external proxies.
VMs per policy
48
vCenter can process 48 VMs at a time. If a single policy
contains more than 48 VMs, the remaining VMs will be
queued during backup.
VMware Backup
appliance
48 concurrent VMs
The maximum concurrent sessions per VMware Backup
appliance is 48, irrespective of the target device.
External proxy
24 concurrent
hotadd of VMDKs
External proxy has only 2 SCSI controllers which limits
the concurrent hotadd sessions to 24. If you back up
more than 24 VMDKs, the backup uses NBD mode.
vCenter
50 concurrent
sessions
EMC recommends a maximum of 50 concurrent VM
backups per vCenter. If vCenter runs on a standalone
server with the vCenter database running on SQL, then a
single vCenter can process more than 50 VMs at a time.
vCenter
5 external proxies
(VMware Backup
appliance includes
an internal proxy)
Due to the above recommendation, EMC recommends 5
external proxies per VMware Backup appliance for
concurrent backups.
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
NetWorker VMware Protection best practices
Observe the following best practices when using the NetWorker VMware Protection
solution.
For best practices specifically related to deployment of the VMware Backup Appliance,
the section VMware Backup Appliances best practices on page 30 provides details.
l
Ensure that the NetWorker server and storage node are at the same version, and that
the VMware Backup Appliance you deploy is compatible with this version, for
example, NetWorker 8.2 SP1 with OVA 1.1.1.50.
l
Use Hotadd transport mode for faster backups and restores and less exposure to
network routing, firewall, and SSL certificate issues. To support Hotadd mode, deploy
the VMware Backup appliance on an ESXi host that has a path to the storage holding
the virtual disk(s) being backed up. In environments using the older VMFSv3 format
datastore, deploy the proxy on the datastore with the largest block size.
Note
Hotadd mode requires VMware hardware version 7 or later. Ensure all VMs being
backed up are using VM hardware version 7 at a minimum.
For sites that contain a large number of VMs that do not support Hotadd
requirements, NBD backups will be used. This can cause congestion on the ESXi host
management network. Plan your backup network carefully for large scale NBD
installs. You may consider:
l
n
Set up Management network redundancy
n
Set up backup network to ESXi for NBD
n
Go to http://www.vmware.com/files/pdf/techpaper/vmw-vsphere-highavailability.pdf to learn how to set up storage heartbeats.
Avoid deploying VMs with IDE virtual disks; using IDE virtual disks degrades backup
performance. Use SCSI virtual disks instead whenever possible.
Note
You cannot use hotadd mode with IDE Virtual disks and therefore backup of these
disks will be performed using NBD mode.
l
During policy configuration, assign clients to a policy based on logical grouping to
allow for better scheduling of backups that will help you avoid resource contention
and create more organized logs for review.
l
EMC recommends performing regular checkpoint backups to protect the VMware
metadata in your environment. You can schedule daily checkpoint discover and
checkpoint backup actions for a VMware Protection Policy within NMC, as outlined in
the section Setup and configure policies in NMC on page 65.
l
When planning for backups, ensure that NetWorker VMware Protection supports the
disk types. Currently, NetWorker VMware Protection does not support the following
disk types:
l
n
Independent (persistent and non-persistent)
n
RDM Independent - Virtual Compatibility Mode
n
RDM Physical Compatibility Mode
Enabling Change Block Tracking (CBT) allows you to achieve faster incremental
backup performance. The default VMware Backup Appliance configuration has a
NetWorker VMware Protection best practices
113
NetWorker VMware Protection
threshold of 25% change per client, which means that if the particular VM has
changed more than 25% since the last backup, a level full backup is performed. In
order to support Changed Block Tracking (CBT):
n
Ensure that all VMs run VMware hardware version 7 or higher.
n
If you add a disk or dynamically expand a disk on a VM, you must take a new full
backup for CBT to function.
For Incremental backups with CBT, remove any existing snapshots of a VM before
adding to the VMware Backup Appliance.
l
When backing up thin-provisioned VMs or disks for VMs on NFS datastores, note that
thin provisioning is not preserved during recovery for NFS datastores. The VMware
knowledgebase article 1035096 at http://kb.vmware.com/kb/1035096 provides
more information.
l
Install VMware Tools on each VM that you want to back up using the EMC Backup and
Recovery user interface in the vSphere Web Client. VMware Tools adds additional
backup capability that quiesces certain processes on the guest OS prior to backup.
VMware Tools is also required for some features used in File Level Restore.
l
For VDDK backups, install the latest VDDK kit:
n
HF222276 for the NetWorker 8.1 VMware Backup Appliance
n
HF222268 for the NetWorker 8.1 SP1 and later VMware Backup Appliance
n
HF207384 for the NetWorker 8.2 and later VMware Backup Appliance
l
Conflicting vSphere Web Client plug-ins can cause unexpected behavior with the EMC
Backup and Recovery user interface in the vSphere Web Client. Examples include the
VDP plug-in, and the HP Insight Manager plug-in. The knowledgebase article at
http://kb.vmware.com/kb/1025360 provides instructions to remove conflicting
plugins.
l
EMC recommends setting an appropriate NetWorker server/storage parallelism value
according to the available resources to reduce queuing. For example, a VMware
Backup Appliance with 5 external proxies and clones requires more than 64 parallel
sessions. Therefore, setting the parallelism for the NetWorker server to 128 or higher
(while also setting the server with 32+ GB memory and 8+ CPUs) will suit such an
environment. The EMC NetWorker Performance Optimization Planning Guide provides
more details.
If you require a larger number of parallel image backups, also consider setting the
maximum number of vCenter SOAP sessions to larger value. Note that this requires
careful planning and additional resources on the vCenter Server You can configure
this by modifying the following line in the vCenter vpxd.cfg file:
<vmacore><soap><maxSessionCount> N </maxSessionCount></
soap></vmacore>
This applies specifically to SDK sessions as opposed to VI client sessions:
114
l
Each VM backup to a Data Domain system consumes more than one session on the
Data Domain device. The default device configuration is target sessions=6 and
max session=60, however EMC recommends that you configure additional devices
for more than 10 parallel backups.
l
VMs with extremely high IO may face hangs during consolidation due to the ESXi
forced operation called synchronous consolidate. Plan your backups of such VMs
according to the amount of workload on the VM.
l
When working with the vCenter database either directly or by using scripts, do not
change the name attribute for the vmfolder object. The knowledgebase article at
https://support.emc.com/kb/190755 provides more information.
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
l
Setting up multiple devices locally on the NetWorker server can lead to resource
contention. Large VMware environments are observed to have more stability when
most backup devices are set up on a remote storage node.
When you mount a backup or clone pool volumes on a remote storage node, then
modify the properties for the VMware Backup Appliance to add these storage node
names under the Globals (2 of 2) tab of the NetWorker Client Properties window in
NMC.
l
Resource contention can occur at various points during the backup cycle. Running
larger savegroups and policies often cause issues due to contention of resources that
impact all running operations. Adjust your resources and times for other larger
savegroups/policies to avoid overlaps, thereby avoiding resource contention.
For example, if you set up a policy where every day at 10pm two policies called
'Bronze1' and 'Bronze2' with 400 clients each start writing to a pool named 'Bronze'
which is configured for just one device on NetWorker, the long wait for device
availability may cause unexpected delays or timeouts. To fix this, set the policy start
times 4 hours apart and add more devices to allow for stable backups.
Limitations and unsupported features
Before you deploy the NetWorker VMware Protection solution, review the following
limitations and unsupported features.
Note
Ensure that you also review the VMware limitations at:
http://www.vmware.com/pdf/vsphere5/r51/vsphere-51-configuration-maximums.pdf
Actions cannot be added to workflows that have the same name in different policies
For traditional workflows, VMware allows the same workflow name to be used in different
policies. However, if you add such a workflow to a policy, you will not be able to add
actions to the workflow.
Datastore names cannot contain spaces or other special characters
Using spaces and other special characters in datastore names can cause problems with
the Virtual Backup appliance, such as failed backups and restores. Special characters
include the following: % & * $ # @ ! \ / : * ? " < > | ;, etc.
External proxy appliance must be at same version as VMware Backup Appliance
Performing an image level recovery in the vSphere Web Client fails with error code 10002
when the external proxy is running an older awncomm version than the VMware Backup
Appliance, due to the addition of the NW_VBA_NAME flag in later versions.
Ensure that the external proxy appliance is at the same version as the VMware Backup
Appliance and if not, upgrade the external proxy. If a recovery is immediately required in
the environment, temporarily shut down all of the external proxies while starting the
restore for the VM. This will ensure that the recovery gets assigned to the VMware Backup
Appliance internal proxy. Knowledgebase article 202211 available at http://
support.emc.com provides more information.
Avamar image backups to Data Domain fail if proxies not added to DD Boost Access list
Avamar VMware image backups to Data Domain fail with errors when you do not add the
proxies to the DD Boost access list.
To add the proxies to the DD Boost access list, run the following command: ddboost
access add clients client-list. Knowledgebase article 168524 available at http://
support.emc.com provides more information.
Limitations and unsupported features
115
NetWorker VMware Protection
FLR browse in EMC Data Protection Restore Client may not display second of three disks
When you browse disks for FLR by using the EMC Data Protection Restore Client, the
second of three disks may not display due to partition detection failing for this specific
disk. The disk will display properly from the command line.
Knowledgebase article 201908 at http://support.emc.com provides possible
workarounds and more information on this issue.
Data Domain SMT not supported
NetWorker VMware Protection does not support Data Domain SMT. You can create a
different user to segregate access to specific DD Boost devices, but not to a specific
secure multi-tenancy (SMT) unit. If you want to protect both Guest and VM images, you
must create two specific DD Boost users; one for the guest backup with SMT, and one for
the VM image backup without SMT.
Do not use combination of FQDN and IP when registering vCenter server
When you register the vCenter server with the VMware Backup appliance and the
NetWorker server, ensure that you specify only the FQDN or only the IP in all instances. Do
not use a combination of the two.
VMware Backup appliance must be deployed to an ESX host managed by the same
vCenter you register the appliance to when using multiple vCenters
When you have multiple vCenters, you must deploy the VMware Backup appliance to an
ESX host that is managed by the same vCenter you register the appliance to. Otherwise, a
connection error appears indicating “Unable to find this EBR in the vCenter inventory.”
Backups to VMware Backup appliance and Data Domain system not supported
You can only backup to the VMware Backup appliance internal storage or a Data Domain
system.
Cloning between Data Domain system and VMware Backup Appliance internal storage
not supported
You cannot clone backups from a Data Domain system to VMware Backup appliance
internal storage, nor can you clone backups from VMware Backup appliance internal
storage to any other devices, including Data Domain systems. However, backups to a
Data Domain system can be cloned to any device that NetWorker supports for cloning.
Only hotadd and NBD transport modes supported
The NetWorker VMware Protection solution supports only the hotadd and NBD transport
modes. The hotadd mode is the default transport mode.
Higher default target session and max session values for VMware Backup Appliance
NetWorker creates the default VMware Backup appliance with the values target
session=50 and max session=200. These values are higher than normal default values
for a device created in NetWorker because each appliance or external proxy comes with 8
proxy agents.
Backup of individual folders within a VM not supported
The NetWorker VMware Protection solution only supports image-level backup and disklevel backup; you cannot perform backups of individual folders within the VM.
NMC's VMware View map view does not display when configuration for VMs within the
vCenter is incomplete
When using NMC’s VMware View, the map view does not appear when the configuration
for one or more VMs in the vCenter is incomplete. To avoid this issue, remove incomplete
VM configurations from vCenter.
116
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
I/O contention when all VMs on a single data store
I/O contention may occur during snapshot creation and backup read operations when all
VMs reside on a single data store.
No automatic migration tool to move from previous solution to NetWorker VMware
Protection
An automatic migration tool to move from the previous VM backup solution to the
NetWorker VMware Protection solution does not exist.
Only English keyboards supported in vSphere Web Client's EMC Backup and Recovery
user interface
The EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the vSphere Web Client only supports
English language keyboards.
Configuration checklist
The following configuration checklist provides best practices and troubleshooting tips
that may help resolve some common issues.
Basic configuration
l
Synchronize system time between vCenter, ESX/ESXi/vSphere, and EMC Backup and
Recovery appliance
l
Assign IPs carefully — do not reuse any IP address
l
Use FQDNs (Fully Qualified Domain Names) everywhere
l
For any network related issue, confirm that forward and reverse DNS lookups work for
each host in the datazone.
Data Domain system configuration
Each Data Domain system has a soft limit to the maximum number of connections and
data streams that can be sustained simultaneously while maintaining performance.
Different models of Data Domain systems have different stream counts as described at
the following link:
https://support.emc.com/kb/180681
Each client VM backup creates two streams to Data Domain:
l
One stream from the NetWorker server (or storage node) to Data Domain
l
One stream from the VMware Backup Appliance node (or external proxy) to Data
Domain
When planning the number of backup sessions, consider the following:
l
To obtain the number of sessions, multiply the total number of VMware Backup
Appliance sessions (all VMware Backup Appliances + all external proxies) by 8, and
then multiply that total by 2.
Note
This does not include VMware Backup Appliance nodes with the internal proxy
disabled
l
You may need to make adjustments depending on whether you configured any other
types of backups simultaneously to this Data Domain system.
l
Note the maximum number of streams allowed by your particular Data Domain
model/configuration. If the combination of the VMware Backup Appliance and other
Configuration checklist
117
NetWorker VMware Protection
sessions exceeds the maximum streams allowed, then performance degradation or
backup and cloning failures may occur. In such cases, you may benefit from
staggering backups.
Additionally, note the following requirements:
l
All Data Domain systems must use DDOS version 5.4 and later
l
Ensure that the Data Domain system does not reach the MTree limit and max-streams
limit
l
Ensure that the DDBoost user has administrator privileges
l
Ensure that only devices from the same Data Domain system host per Data Domain
system pool when used in any Action
Monitoring Stream Counts (Advanced)
You can monitor changes to the stream by using an SSH connection to the Data Domain
system.
1. Launch PuTTY and connect to Data Domain over SSH as sysadmin.
2. Run the system show performance command, as shown in the following
example.
Example 3 Stream counts output
When you run the following command, the output displays stream counts over a period of
5 minutes, with a maximum of 15 streams.
system show performance custom-view throughput,streams duration
5 min interval 1 min
Figure 49 Monitoring stream counts output
Example 4 Exceeding max sessions
In this example, you notice a performance issue during backups to a Data Domain 670
system, which you set up with one VMware Backup Appliance node (with internal proxy
disabled) and 12 external proxies. Additionally, you will run Exchange and UNIX backups
for a total of 150 clients each day, with a maximum parallelism of 40.
Considerations:
118
l
Maximum number of VMware Backup Appliance sessions ((node=0 + external
proxy=12) * 8 ) *2 = 192
l
Are any other types of backups configured? Yes. The max parallelism is set to 40
l
Max number of streams allowed by this Data Domain model (mixed Total) = 140
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Example 4 Exceeding max sessions (continued)
Now, since the totals from the first two bullets (192+40=232) exceed ‘Max stream
allowed’ (140), you should stagger the backups to run a lower session count. Some
suggestions to achieve this include:
l
Set up group start times to simultaneously work only through 6 clusters (VMware
Backup Appliance external proxies ( 6 * 8 * 2)) = 96 streams.
l
Reduce the parallelism for other backups to lower than 25.
The combined parallel stream count (VMware Backup Appliance + others) should now be
lower than 140 at all times.
If the number of clients required for backup continues to grow, you may want to set up a
Data Domain system that allows for a higher stream count, such as a DD 7200, for these
operations.
Changing the Data Domain Boost password
When you change the password of the Data Domain Boost user, perform the following
steps to ensure you also make the change on the VMware Backup appliance.
1. Update the password in the NMC Device Properties window, or in the Device
Configuration wizard, for all devices belonging to the Data Domain host for which the
password was changed.
2. Run the following command on the EMC Backup and Recovery Console in the vSphere
Client:
mccli dd edit --name=fqdn --password=newpassword --passwordconfirm=newpassword --user-name=boostuser
NetWorker configuration
l
Ensure that NetWorker services are up before you configure the EMC Backup and
Recovery appliance
l
Leave “Source Storage Node” empty when you configure the “VM Backup” action
l
Ensure that the relevant devices are mounted
l
Wait until you successfully configure a policy before you run the policy.
VMware Backup appliance installation
If you have problems with the VMware Backup appliance installation:
l
Confirm that all of the software meets the minimum software requirements (see
System requirements on page 27).
l
Confirm that the hardware meets the minimum hardware requirements (see System
requirements on page 27).
l
Confirm that DNS is properly configured for the VMware Backup appliance (see Preinstallation requirements on page 30).
VMware Backup appliance configuration
l
Supports configuration on thin disks
l
Use the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window to confirm that all services on
the VMware Backup appliance except backup scheduler are running. Note that
maintenance services will start between 24 to 48 hours after booting up. You can also
start maintenance services manually if desired.
Configuration checklist
119
NetWorker VMware Protection
l
Do not add more than 500 VMs to a VMware Backup appliance to avoid slower
recovery times
l
Ensure that the VMware Backup appliance still has space left for backups
l
VMware snapshot for backup is not supported for independent disks
Peer information issues
Peer information issues can occur for the VMware Backup Appliance and its external
proxies when you redeploy an appliance or upgrade the proxy appliance.
To identify and correct peer information issues, perform the following.
Procedure
1. Render the logs:
nsr_render_log /nsr/logs/daemon.raw | grep peer
2. If you notice errors, check the host names involved and remove peer information for
the problem hosts.
3. Log in to the problem host and check the hostname. Ensure that the NetWorker
nsrladb shows the correct host names on both affected machines.
You discover the following error message on your NetWorker server nwserver1:
nwserver1.example.com nsrexecd GSS critical An authentication request
from nwproxy1.example.com was denied. The 'NSR peer information'
provided did not match the one stored by nwserver1.example.com. To
accept this request, delete the 'NSR peer information' resource with
the following attributes from nwserver1.example.com's NSRLA database:
name: nwproxy1.example.com; NW instance ID: e3d0db59-00000004abab1f2b-5498736c-00010000-00000000; peer hostname:
nwproxy1.example.com
To fix, you run the following commands on nwserver1:
nsradmin -p nsrexec
nsradmin> d type: nsr peer information; name: nwproxy1.example.com
Delete? Yes
nsradmin> quit
Then, you log in to nwproxy1 and check to ensure the host name is valid.
Connectivity between the VMware Backup Appliance and the ESXi/vCenter
Use the following procedure to validate basic connectivity between the VMware Backup
Appliance (or external proxy) and ESXi hosts/vCenter.
1. Connect to the VMware Backup Appliance or external proxy using PuTTY.
Note
For NetWorker 8.2 or later VMware Backup Appliances, login as admin.
2. Run the following command to test connectivity to a particular host(port): curl
hostname-or-IP:port
Example 5 Example command
120
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Example 5 Example command (continued)
curl esxi.my.local:902
220 VMware Authentication Daemon Version 1.10: SSL Required,
ServerDaemonProtocol:SOAP, MKSDisplayProtocol:VNC , VMXARGS supported
If you receive a response such as "curl: (7) couldn't connect to host", this may indicate
that there is a host-based connectivity issue or network firewall software blocking
connectivity.
Connectivity between the VMware Backup Appliance and the NetWorker server
Use the following test to validate connectivity between the VMware Backup Appliance
node (or external proxy) and the NetWorker server.
Before you begin
Before running the test, log in to NMC and create a client for the external proxy.
Procedure
1. Connect to the VMware Backup Appliance or external proxy using PuTTY.
For NetWorker 8.2 or later VMware Backup Appliances, login as admin.
2. Run the following command.
save -J <storage-node> -s <nw-server> -b <pool> /etc/hosts
save -J nw-sn1.my.local -s nw82sp1.my.local -b boostPool /etc/hosts
libDDBoost version: major: 3, minor: 0, patch: 1, engineering: 1,
build: 459919
86704:save: Successfully established DDCL session for save-set ID
'3974440777' (ebr82sp1.my.local:/etc/hosts).
/etc/hosts
/etc/
/
save: /etc/hosts 8 KB 00:00:03
3 files
94694:save: The backup of save set '/etc/hosts' succeeded.
If the output shows the backup was successful, you can skip the remaining steps.
3. If the backup fails, check the /etc/hosts file for the following entry:
127.0.0.1
::1
localhost.localdomain localhost
localhost.localdomain localhost
If not present, add these entries to the hosts file. If you see these entries, skip to the
next step.
Note
If logged in as admin, switch to root by using the su - command.
4. Check for any peer information issues on the VMware Backup Appliance or external
proxy host and the NetWorker server and clear up these issues.
5. Run a debug backup to check for other issues such as DNS errors:
save –D2 -J <storage-node> -s <nw-server> -b <pool> /etc/
hosts
Connectivity between the VMware Backup Appliance and the NetWorker server
121
NetWorker VMware Protection
6. Ensure that the Network Portgroup for the VM (VMware Backup Appliance or external
proxy) is set on the correct port group.
AV-NetWorker Communicator (avnwcomm) timeout
The default timeout for avnwcomm communication between the proxy and the NetWorker
server is two minutes.
During the backup window, the following issues may cause a delayed response from
NetWorker, leading to failures during backup and restore operations:
l
Devices unavailable
l
Low server parallelism
l
Peer information issues
l
DNS problems
l
Offsite deployments where the VMware Backup appliance node or proxy are on a
different site from the NetWorker server
For sites experiencing delays, you can tune the avnwcomm inactivity timeout to allow for
longer wait times, for example 7 to 8 minutes, using the following procedure.
1. Run the following command to verify the version.
/usr/local/avamarclient/bin/avnwcomm --version
This setting applies only to the following NetWorker and OVA versions for the VMware
Backup appliance node or external proxy.
NetWorker version OVA version Command output Notes
8.1 SP1
1.0.1.9
7.0.161-7
Patch only
8.1 SP2
1.0.2.16
7.0.162-11
Patch only
8.2
1.1.0.149
7.0.160-13
Patch only
8.2 SP1
1.1.1.50
7.0.161-6
Built-in
8.2 SP2
1.1.2.6
7.1.62-4
Built-in
Note
You can obtain the patch for avnwcomm from https://support.emc.com/kb/195372.
2. Create a file on the VMware Backup appliance node and external proxy called
avnwcomm.cmd under /usr/local/avamarclient/var/ for NetWorker 8.2.x,
or /usr/local/avamarclient/var-proxy-? for NetWorker 8.1.x.
3. Edit avnwcomm.cmd to add the following:
--nw_init_timeout=420
4. Ensure you have the correct permissions by running:
chmod 755 /usr/local/avamarclient/var/avnwcomm.cmd
122
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Log in to the EMC Backup and Recovery Console as admin instead of root
When you use ssh to connect or login to the EMC Backup and Recovery Console, ensure
that you login as the admin user instead of root. Direct login as the root user is not
permitted.
After you ssh to the Console as admin, you can then switch to the root user, as shown in
the following example:
# ssh <VBA-host> -l admin
Password:
#su
Password:
If you connect to the EMC Backup and Recovery Console via the vSphere Client, you can
log in as the root user.
Note
The password for the admin user is the same as the password that was specified in the
EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window during the initial installation of the VMware
Backup appliance.
Note
Modifying the ssh configuration file in /etc/ssh so that a user can ssh into the appliance
directly as root is not recommended as it may result in future upgrade failures.
Unable to add VM to a policy in NMC's VMware View when you register multiple
VMware Backup Appliance's with a combination of IP and FQDN
When you register multiple VMware Backup Appliances to the NetWorker server and
vCenter, use only the IP or only the FQDN but do not use a combination.
When you use a mix of IP and FQDN, for example, Appliance 1 is registered using
NetWorker server FQDN and vCenter IP, but Appliance 2 is registered using NetWorker
server FQDN and vCenter FQDN, issues may occur when adding a VM to a policy, such as
the option to add a VM to a policy not appearing in NMC's VMware View.
When you register the VMware Backup Appliance with the NetWorker server and vCenter
using the EMC Backup and Recovery Configuration utility, EMC recommends that you
always specify FQDN.
Launch of EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window fails when using Chrome or
Firefox web browsers
242550
Google Chrome and Mozilla Firefox web browsers may fail to open the EMC Backup and
Recovery Configure window.
Workaround
If the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window does not open with Chrome or Firefox,
use the following workaround procedure:
1. As the root user on UNIX, or Administrator on Windows, edit the /usr/local/
avamar-tomcat/conf/server.xml file with the following modifications to the
ciphers:
Before:
Log in to the EMC Backup and Recovery Console as admin instead of root
123
NetWorker VMware Protection
<Connector SSLEnabled="true" Server="Avamar"
ciphers="TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA,SSL_RSA_WITH_RC4_1
28_MD5,SSL_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA,TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
,TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA,TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_C
BC_SHA,SSL_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA,SSL_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_E
DE_CBC_SHA,SSL_DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA,TLS_KRB5_WITH_R
C4_128_SHA,TLS_KRB5_WITH_RC4_128_MD5,TLS_KRB5_WITH_3DES_EDE_
CBC_SHA,TLS_KRB5_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_MD5"
clientAuth="false" maxKeepAliveRequests="1" maxThreads="150"
port="8543" maxHttpHeaderSize="32768"
protocol="org.apache.coyote.http11.Http11NioProtocol"
scheme="https" secure="true"
sslEnabledProtocols="TLSv1,TLSv1.1,TLSv1.2,SSLv2Hello"
sslProtocol="TLS"/>
After:
<Connector SSLEnabled="true" Server="Avamar"
ciphers="TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256,TLS_ECDHE_RSA
_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA,
TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384,TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES
_256_CBC_SHA,TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA,
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256,TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
,TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256,
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA,SSL_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA"
clientAuth="false" maxKeepAliveRequests="1" maxThreads="150"
port="8543" maxHttpHeaderSize="32768"
protocol="org.apache.coyote.http11.Http11NioProtocol"
scheme="https" secure="true"
sslEnabledProtocols="TLSv1,TLSv1.1,TLSv1.2,SSLv2Hello"
sslProtocol="TLS"/>
2. Restart the browser. You should now be able to open the EMC Backup and Recovery
Configure window.
Removing VMware Protection Policy when VMware Backup Appliance is offline
If you attempt to delete a VMware Protection Policy from NMC's Administration window
for a VMware Backup Appliance that is offline, the following error appears:
Delete operation failed for the following VBA's Detailed logs:couldnt
not delete backup job on VBA <VBA_Name>,error: VBA returned status of
failure:details "NW_7007:Unable to locate backup job to delete <VBA
policy>
To remove the VMware Protection Policy:
1. Open the <networker install directory>/res directory and copy nsrdb
to a safe location.
2. Stop the nsrd service.
3. Connect to nsrdb by using nsradmin:
nsradmin -d <path to nsrdb>
. type: NSR data protection policy
Print
The command returns multiple policies.
124
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
4. Select the policy you want to delete by specifying the name of the policy in the
following syntax:
. type: nsr data protection policy ; name: BadPolicy
5. Delete the policy. When prompted to confirm deletion, type Yes.
6. Restart the nsrd service.
Log file locations
Review the following EMC Backup and Recovery appliance log file locations:
l
Tomcat logs — /usr/local/avamar-tomcat/logs catalina.out for HTTP request and
respond at high level
l
EMC Backup and Recovery server logs — /usr/local/avamar/var/ebr/server_log/ebrserver.log for specific EMC Backup and Recovery activities
l
MC logs — /usr/local/avamar/var/mc/server_log
l
MC Soap service logs — /usr/local/avamar/var/mc/server_log/axis2.log
l
Boot logs — /usr/local/avamar/var/av_boot.log
/usr/local/avamar/var/av_boot_err.log
l
EMC Backup and Recovery configure or registration with EMC Backup and Recovery
appliance logs — /usr/local/avamar/var/ebr/server_log/ebr-configure.log
l
File Level Recovery logs — /usr/local/avamar/var/flr/server_log
l
NetWorker log file location — /nsr/logs/
Collecting log files
To collect all log files on the EMC Backup and Recovery appliance:
1. Connect to the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window, as shown in Figure
11 on page 53.
2. On the Status tab, click Collect Logs.
3. Click Collect logs.
4. Save the zip file to the local machine that you used to open the EMC Backup and
Recovery Configure window.
Enabling low-level logging of NetWorker web server on Windows systems
To enable low-level logging, log into the NetWorker server and perform the following
steps:
1. Open a command prompt and run cmd.exe.
2. Use Task Manager to get the pid of nsrvmwsd.
3. CD to networker-install-dir > \nsr\bin.
4. Run dbgcommand -p > <nsrvmwsd-pid > > Debug=11.
NetWorker operations
The following troubleshooting items provide some direction on how to identify and
resolve common issues with NetWorker and VMware Protection Policies.
Log file locations
125
NetWorker VMware Protection
Inactivity timeout in NMC for VMware Protection Policies
Wait times for a backup session may vary and can increase for environments with a large
amount of backups running and in queue.
Even though EMC recommends staggering backups to avoid long queues, setting the
Inactivity Timeout variable in NMC's Edit VMware Action window to a lower value can
cause queued policies to fail. However, setting this variable is very useful to avoid
backups stalling for long durations. Before setting the Inactivity Timeout, confirm that the
NetWorker server configuration is stable and does not show backups in queue for long
durations.
VMware Protection Policy fails for manually created client resource with DataDomain backup
attribute enabled
When you manually create a client resource and enable the DataDomain backup attribute
(using nsradmin or the NMC Client Properties window), the default VMware Protection
Policy fails with the following error:
NWP_LOG_OUTPUT: NW Client Plugin: ABORT session operation successful.
Reason for abort: nwp_start_backup_session_helper: no matching IP
interface data domain devices for save of client clientname; check
storage nodes, devices or pools
If this occurs, unselect/disable the DataDomain backup attribute on the manually
created client resource.
“No proxies running on VBA {appliance name} for backing up VM {VM name}”
When the avagent is not running, or no proxies are running, this error appears in the
VMware Protection Policy details window in NMC.
If you see this error, log in as root from the EMC Backup and Recovery Console in the
vSphere Client and invoke service avagent restart:
/etc/init.d/avagent restart
System proxy configuration handling on SuSE
For NetWorker servers on the SuSE Linux platform where system proxy is enabled, you
must remove or change the system proxy configuration to allow for connectivity to the
VMware Backup Appliance.
Perform one of the following options.
l
To disable the system proxy, open the /etc/sysconfig/proxy file in a text editor and
set PROXY_ENABLED="no"
l
To add an exception, modify the NO_PROXY line in the /etc/sysconfig/proxy file to
include the IP address of each VMware Backup Appliance instance, for example:
NO_PROXY="localhost, 127.0.0.1, <VMA IP1>[,<VBA IP2>[,…]]"
The knowledgebase article at http://www.novell.com/support/kb/doc.php?id=7006845
provides more information.
NetWorker web services timeout
Due to the extended time required to perform larger operations such as cross-sync,
NetWorker web services may time out.
For example, web services may request a clean-up of a large amount of data on the
VMware Backup Appliance, for which the time required to complete the operation
126
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
exceeds the timeout setting. When a VMware Backup Appliance communication timeout
occurs, an "operation timed out" error message appears.
To fix VMware Backup Appliance communication timeouts, you can set two environment
variables on the NetWorker server -- one for connection attempts to the VMware Backup
Appliance, and the other for requests.
NSR_VBA_CONNECT_TIMEOUT=900
NSR_VBA_REQUEST_TIMEOUT=2400
If your timeout values are lower than these numbers, EMC recommends updating to these
values.
Note
Values are in seconds. The maximum value permitted for NSR_VBA_CONNECT_TIMEOUT is
1200 and the maximum value permitted for NSR_VBA_REQUEST_TIMEOUT is 3600.
Changes to these values may depend on the operating system of the NetWorker server.
The sections "Setting environment variables on UNIX" and "Setting environment variables
on Windows systems" in the EMC NetWorker Administration Guide provide more
information. If VMware Backup Appliance registration fails with the Networker server after
the initial deployment and registration, you can also set NSR_VBA_CONNECT_TIMEOUT at
the operating system level for successful registration.
On Linux, login to the NetWorker server and perform the following:
1. Run # printenv | grep NSR_VBA_CONNECT_TIMEOUT export
NSR_VBA_CONNECT_TIMEOUT=900.
2. Restart NetWorker services by using the command /etc/init.d/networker
restart.
3. Run emwebapp.sh --restart on the VMware Backup Appliance.
To re-register the VMware Backup Appliance on Windows:
1. Right-click My Computer > Select Environment Variables.
2. Add a new variable NSR_VBA_CONNECT_TIMEOUT with the value 900.
3. Restart NetWorker services on the NetWorker server and run emwebapp.sh -restart on the VMware Backup Appliance.
vCenter server operations
The following troubleshooting items provide some direction on how to identify and
resolve common issues from the vCenter server.
Clear All EMC Backup and Recovery plug-ins
1. Log into vCenter Server's MOB at http://vcenter-server/mob.
2. Click on the content link.
3. Click on ExtensionManager link.
4. Click on the UnregisterExtension link.
5. Enter the value com.emc.networker.ebr and click the Invoke Method link.
vCenter server operations
127
NetWorker VMware Protection
Enable HTTP access from EMC Backup and Recovery
1. Login into the vCenter server console, then type:
vi /var/lib/vmware/vsphere-client/webclient.properties
2. Ensure that the output contains a line similar to allowHttp=true.
vSphere Client operations
The following troubleshooting items describe how to identify and resolve common issues
that occur with EMC Backup and Recovery Console from the vSphere Client, or the EMC
Backup and Recovery user interface in the vSphere Web Client.
After ESX upgrade to 6.0, EMC Backup and Recovery plug-in missing from vSphere Web Client
242527
After you upgrade ESX to vCenter 6.0 on NetWorker 8.2.x, the EMC Backup and Recovery
plug-in disappears from the vSphere Web Client and the following error displays upon
opening the vSphere Web Client:
ERROR "An internal error has occurred-Unable to load resource
module from /EBR2/locales/EBR-en_US.swf"
Workaround
To avoid this issue, add port 9443 into the vSphere Web Client browse request, and then
open the vCenter. Type the following address:
https://<vCenter_IP>:9443
where:
vsCenter_IP is the IP address of the vSphere Web Client.
128
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Restart the Enterprise Manager Web Application (emwebapp)
Use the following steps to restart emwebapp.
Note
When you use ssh to connect or login to the EMC Backup and Recovery Console in the
vSphere Client, ensure that you login as admin instead of root. The section Log in to the
EMC Backup and Recovery Console as admin instead of root on page 123 provides more
information.
1. Log into the Console, and then type:
emwebapp.sh --stop
emwebapp.sh --start
2. Restart the EMC Backup and Recovery database by running:
emwebapp.sh --stop
su – admin
ebrdbmaint.pl --startdb
exit
emwebapp.sh --start
3. Patch the EMC Backup and Recovery server by running:
emwebapp.sh --stop
cd /usr/local/avamar/lib/ebr
mv ebr-server.war ebr-server.war.orig
4. Use SFTP to upload the new war file to this location:
emwebapp.sh --start*
Time synchronization error
A time synchronization error can occur when launching the EMC Backup and Recovery
user interface in the vSphere Web Client in the following scenarios:
l
When you configure the EMC Backup and Recovery appliance to synchronize its time
with the ESX server on which the appliance runs.
l
When the vCenter server is a VM, and runs on an ESX server that differs from the ESX
server that hosts the EMC Backup and Recovery appliance.
In such environments, if the times differ on the two ESX servers, and the vCenter server is
not set up to synchronize with the ESX server it runs on, then the following errors appear
in the vSphere Web Client interface:
The most recent request has been rejected by the server.
The most common cause for this error is that the times on the EMC
Backup and Recovery appliance and your SSO server are not in sync
To fix this issue:
1. Verify that the times match on all the ESX servers in your environment. You can
configure the time settings in the vCenter UI. EMC recommends that you configure the
time settings to use NTP. The VMware knowledgebase article 2012069 provides
details on configuring NTP on ESX/ESXi hosts using the vSphere Client.
2. On your vCenter system, ensure that it is configured to synchronize its time with the
ESX server it is running on by running the following:
vmware-toolbox-cmd timesync enable
vSphere Client operations
129
NetWorker VMware Protection
3. Verify that the time on your EMC Backup and Recovery appliance and your vCenter
server are the same by running the date command on each.
Note
Allow a couple of minutes after making the changes for times to merge.
4. Log in to the vSphere Web Client. If the time synchronization message does not
appear when you launch the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface, the times have
been synchronized successfully.
Restart vSphere Web Client Server
To restart the vSphere Web Client server:
1. Log into the vCenter server console, then type:
cd /usr/lib/vmware-vsphere-client
2. Run ./vsphere-client stop.
3. Run ./vsphere-client start.
Start user interface does not display as available in vSphere Web Client
If the user interface does not display as available in the vSphere Web Client, log into
vCenter and restart the vSphere Client Services by running the following from a command
prompt:
cd /usr/lib/vmware-vsphere-client
./vsphere-client stop
./vsphere-client start
When you deploy a VM, do not change the default network (VM Network) provided by the
wizard. After the deployment completes and prior to powering on the VM, reconfigure the
VM to use the appropriate network if VM Network is not correct. If you change the network
in the wizard, EMC Backup and Recovery looks for eth1 instead of eth0, and network
connectivity fails.
Launching the Console in the vSphere Web Client to reboot the VM
When you log into the vSphere Web client and launch the Console for the EMC Backup
and Recovery appliance, a delay of several minutes may occur while the VM reboots. A
message similar to the following appears in the output:
Identity added: /home/dpn/.ssh/dpnid (/home/dpn/.ssh/dpnid)
If you see this message, do not shutdown the VM, and allow time for the reboot to
complete.
The EMC Backup and Recovery appliance is not responding. Please try your request again
If you were previously able to connect to EMC Backup and Recovery and this message
appears, check the following:
l
130
Confirm that the user name or password used to validate EMC Backup and Recovery
to the vCenter Server has not changed. Only one user account and password are used
for EMC Backup and Recovery validation. This is configured through the EMC Backup
and Recovery Configure window.
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
l
Confirm that the name and IP address of the appliance have not changed since the
initial EMC Backup and Recovery installation. DNS Configuration on page 31 provides
additional information.
Integrity Check
After you start an integrity check, a delay of several seconds may occur before the “EBR:
Integrity Check” task shows up in the Recent Tasks pane of the EMC Backup and Recovery
user interface in the vSphere Web Client. Similarly, when you cancel an integrity check, a
delay of several seconds may occur before the task is cancelled.
In some cases (for example, when the integrity check progress is above 90%), the
integrity check may actually complete before the cancel operation completes. Even when
the integrity check completes successfully, the Task Console may still show an error
indicating that the integrity check was cancelled.
If you knew that the Integrity Check Status of the appliance (shown on the Reports tab)
was “Out of Date” before you started the integrity check, then you can look at the status
immediately after you cancel the job to see if the cancel operation succeeded. If the
Integrity Check Status is “Normal,” then the check was successful. If the status is “Out of
Date,” then the check was cancelled.
Backup operations
The following troubleshooting items provide some direction on how to identify and
resolve common issues with NetWorker VMware Protection backups.
Backups fail when EMC Backup and Recovery plug-in registers with an incorrect version string in
vCenter
Backups may fail when the EMC Backup and Recovery plug-in registers with an incorrect
version string in vCenter. Additionally, EMC Backup and Recovery cannot co-exist with
VMware VDP or any third-party backup plug-in in the same vCenter. If a conflict occurs,
then unregister the EMC Backup and Recovery plug-in extension from the managed object
browser (MOB):
1. Navigate to http://vcenter-ip/mob.
2. In the Properties table, select the content link.
3. Select Extension Manager and verify that the Properties table lists
“com.emc.networker.ebr”.
4. From the Methods table, select UnregisterExtension.
5. Type com.emc.networker.ebr and select Invoke Method.
Note
This name will be different if removing VDP or a third party backup plug-in.
6. Verify in Extension Manager that the plug-in is no longer listed in the Properties
table, and then restart vCenter services or the vCenter server.
7. Restart emwebapp on the EMC Backup and Recovery appliance by using the
command emwebapp.sh --restart.
“Loading backup job data”
This message can appear for up to five minutes when you select a large number of VMs
(approximately 100 VMs) for a single backup job. This issue can also apply to lock/
unlock, refresh, or delete actions for large jobs. This is expected behavior when you
Backup operations
131
NetWorker VMware Protection
select a very large number of jobs. This message disappears when the action is
completed, which can take up to five minutes.
“Unable to add client {client name} to the EMC Backup and Recovery appliance while creating
backup job {backupjob name}.”
This error can appear when there is a duplicate client name on the vApp container or the
ESX/ESXi host. In this case only one backup job is added. Resolve any duplicate client
names.
“The following items could not be located and were not selected {client name}.”
This error can occur when the backed up VM(s) cannot be located during Edit of a backup
job. This is a known issue.
Windows 2008 R2 VMs may fail to backup with “disk.EnableUUID” configured to “true.”
Windows 2008 R2 backups may fail if the VM is configured with the disk.EnableUUID
parameter set to true. To correct this problem, manually update the vmx configuration
parameter disk.EnableUUID to false by using the vSphere Web Client:
1. Shut down the VM by right clicking the VM and selecting Shut Down Guest OS.
2. Right click the VM and select Edit Settings.
3. Click VM Options.
4. Expand the Advanced section and click Edit Configuration.
5. Locate the name disk.EnableUUId and set the value to false.
6. Click OK on the next two pages.
7. Right click the VM and select Power On.
After you update the configuration parameter, the backups of the Windows 2008 R2 VM
should succeed.
Backup fails if EMC Backup and Recovery does not have sufficient datastore capacity
Scheduled backups fail at 92% complete if there is insufficient datastore capacity. If you
configured the EMC Backup and Recovery datastore with thin provisioning and maximum
capacity has not been reached, then add additional storage resources. If you configured
the EMC Backup and Recovery datastore with thick provisioning and it is at full capacity,
see EMC Backup and Recovery Capacity Management on page 100.
Backup fails if VM is enabled with VMware Fault Tolerance
When you enable Fault Tolerance for a VM, the backup fails. This is expected behavior;
EMC Backup and Recovery does not support backing up VMs with Fault Tolerance
enabled.
When VMs are moved in or out of different cluster groups, associated backup sources may be lost
When you move hosts into clusters with the option to retain the resource pools and
vApps, the containers get recreated, not copied. As a result, the container is no longer the
same container even though the name is the same. To resolve this issue, validate or
recreate any backup jobs that protect containers after moving hosts in or out of a cluster.
132
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
After an unexpected shutdown, recent backup jobs and backups are lost
When an unexpected shutdown occurs, the VMware Backup appliance performs a
rollback to the last validated checkpoint. This is expected behavior.
vMotion operations are not allowed during active backup operations
The vSphere vMotion feature enables the live migration of running VMs from one physical
server to another. You cannot run vMotion operations on the VMware Backup appliance
during active backup operations. This is expected behavior. Wait until all backup
operations have completed prior to performing a vMotion operation.
Backups fail if certain characters are used in the VM name, datastore, folder, or datacenter names
When you use special characters in the VM name, datastore, folder, or datacenter names,
the .vmx file is not included in the backup. The VMware Backup appliance does not
backup objects that include the following special characters, in the format of character/
escape sequence:
l
& %26
l
+ %2B
l
/ %2F
l
= %3D
l
? %3F
l
% %25
l
\ %5C
l
~ %7E
l
] %5D
Restore operations
The following troubleshooting items describe how to identify and resolve some common
issues with restores.
Restore to new virtual machine not available for backups that included physical RDM disks
When you back up a virtual machine that contains both virtual disks and physical Raw
Device Mapping (RDM) disks, the backup successfully processes the virtual disks and
bypasses the RDM disks, which are not supported for backup. However, when you restore
data from one of these backups, you cannot restore the data to a new virtual machine
because data residing on the physical RDM disks that were bypassed during the backup
cannot be restored.
If you need to restore the data to a new virtual machine, perform the following:
1. Manually create a new virtual machine in vCenter. This new virtual machine must
contain the same number of virtual disks as the original virtual machine from which
the backup was taken.
2. Manually add the new virtual machine to NetWorker.
3. Restore the data to this virtual machine.
Restore tab shows backups taken after checkpoint backup as "not available"
When you complete a successful disaster recovery of the VMware Backup appliance, and
then attempt to restore a backup performed after the last checkpoint backup, the Restore
Restore operations
133
NetWorker VMware Protection
tab in the EMC Backup and Recovery user interface in the vSphere Web Client displays
these backups as "not available." This occurs because no account for these backups
exists, since the client or VM was added to the policy after the checkpoint backup.
When you add the client or VM back into a policy, backups display correctly with a valid
path in the Restore tab.
Message appears during FLR indicating “error finding vm by ipAddr” when you do not install
VMware Tools
You must install VMware Tools to perform FLR. When you do not install VMware Tools, a
message appears indicating the restore client is unable to find a backup of a VM by IP.
Message appears indicating “Login failed. Cannot locate vm in vCenter.”
This error can occur when you attempt to connect to the EMC Data Protection Restore
Client from a host that has not been backed up by the VMware Backup appliance
Log into a virtual machine that has been backed up by the VMware Backup appliance,
and then connect to the restore client.
Restore tab shows a “Loading backups” message and is slow to load
It typically takes two seconds per VM backup to load each of the backups on the Restore
tab. This is expected behavior.
Restore tab is slow to load or refresh
If there is a large number of VMs, then the Restore tab may be slow to load or refresh. For
example, when you have approximately 100 VMs, the Restore tab can take up to four and
a half minutes to load.
Adding external proxies
The VMware Backup appliance has 8 internal proxies. A proxy can only do one backup or
restore at a time.
If you need more proxies, then deploy an external proxy OVA. The section Proxy
assignment for backup and recovery on page 34 provides information.
Creating and analyzing crashes on Windows 2008 R2
1. Update the registry with the new key provided at http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/
library/bb787181(VS.85).aspx.
Using the recommended values, the dump file gets created in C:\Users
\Administrator\AppData\Local\CrashDumps
2. Enable full crash dumps.
3. File an Open dump file in windbg.
4. To retrieve the full information, type analyze --v in the bottom command window.
Network protection software exclusions
Some network protection software, such as Kaspersky Internet security, may block
incoming connections on the NetWorker server, which can cause monitoring failures.
EMC recommends adding exclusions to the monitoring software to allow for
communication with the VMware Backup Appliance and its external proxy hosts.
134
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
NetWorker VMware Protection
Ensure backup pool volumes mounted at all times
The DD Boost volumes on the NetWorker server may be impacted by network issues or
resource contention, causing the volumes to unmount and triggering alerts "Waiting for #
writable volume."
To fix this issue, EMC recommends mounting the volumes immediately.
Missing permissions for sites with LDAP configured
For sites with LDAP configured for NMC, missing permissions can cause backups for a
VMware Backup Appliance or external proxy to fail with messages similar to the following
in the avnwcomm (activity) log on the proxy:
avnwcomm Error <0000>: Received error from NetWorker connection
attempt:
Error Code 21: cannot get policy details, could not get Action for
Policy = test2. Hence, could not determine pool, browse,
retention.
To fix this issue, add the following user to the server administrators:
root@vba-name
root@proxy-name
Where VBA-name is the FQDN of the VMware Backup Appliance node, and proxy-name is
the FQDN of the external proxy.
Alternatively, you can open access to all hosts/users by adding *@*. The knowledgebase
article 174188, available at https://support.emc.com/kb/174188, provides more
information.
Accessing Knowledge Base Articles
Additional troubleshooting information is available through the Featured VMware
Documentation Sets website at https://www.vmware.com/support/pubs/. Select
Support > Search Knowledge Base.
Checkpoint discover timeout
When performing checkpoint discover actions in environments with a large datastore or
more than 5 external proxies deployed, the VMware Backup Appliance may remain in
"Query Pending" state for a period of time that exceeds the default timeout value before
the status changes to "Success."
In the base NetWorker 8.1.x and 8.2.x releases, the default wait time is 2 minutes. In the
latest cumulative releases for NetWorker 8.1 and 8.2, the default value is 5 minutes.
When the timeout is reached, messages similar to the following appear in the NetWorker
policy logs:
nsrdiscover: Configuration for VBA is in pending state. Retrying...
nsrdiscover: Cannot retrieve checkpoint tag. Timed out retrying.
To increase the timeout value for checkpoint discovery to 5 minutes, upgrade to the latest
NetWorker cumulative release. If you require a timeout value greater than 5 minutes, you
can then modify the timeout by setting the environment variable
NSR_VBA_CPTAG_REQUEST_TIMEOUT=<value>, where value is in seconds. The maximum
value permitted is 3600 seconds (one hour).
Ensure backup pool volumes mounted at all times
135
NetWorker VMware Protection
Note
EMC recommends that you only register required proxies. The section "Proxy
Registrations" provides more information.
Regenerate SSL certificates on the VMware Backup Appliance
Use the following procedure to regenerate the SSL certificate on the VMware Backup
Appliance.
Procedure
1. Run emwebapp.sh --stop to stop emwebapp.
2. Back up the existing keystore:
cp /root/.keystore /root/.keystore.sav
3. Delete the tomcat certificate from the keystore:
/usr/java/latest/bin/keytool -delete -alias tomcat storepass changeit
4. Regenerate the SSL certificate using SHA256:
/usr/java/latest/bin/keytool -genkeypair -v -alias tomcat keyalg RSA -sigalg SHA256withRSA -keystore /root/.keystore storepass changeit -keypass changeit -validity 3650 -dname
"CN=localhost.localdom, OU=Avamar, O=EMC, L=Irvine,
S=California, C=US"
5. Run emwebapp.sh --start to start emwebapp.
6. On the Networker server, stop the nsrvmwsd task/service.
Allow 10-20 minutes for the changes to take effect. If you still experience issues after
this time, re-register the VMware Backup Appliance to the vCenter server and
Networker server and reboot the VBA when completed.
Note
At any time during this procedure, you can look up the SSL key by running the
following command: /usr/java/latest/bin/keytool -list -keystore /
root/.keystore -storepass changeit -alias tomcat
136
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
CHAPTER 3
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
This chapter contains the following topics:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Software and hardware requirements..................................................................138
Limitations and unsupported features.................................................................139
Transport modes................................................................................................. 140
Changed Block Tracking (CBT)............................................................................. 141
Configuration options..........................................................................................142
Configuring the VADP proxy host and Hypervisor resource................................... 142
Configuring a virtual client for backup................................................................. 149
Creating a VADP User role in vCenter................................................................... 153
Configuring Changed Block Tracking (CBT).......................................................... 157
Monitor VMs........................................................................................................158
Launching the vSphere Web Client from the NetWorker Console (Windows only). 158
Recovering VADP Backups...................................................................................158
VADP Planning and Best Practices....................................................................... 168
Upgrading from VCB to VADP (pre-NetWorker 8.1)............................................... 184
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
137
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Software and hardware requirements
The software and hardware requirements for VADP include:
l
l
One or more VADP proxy systems running any of the following 64-bit operating
systems (English versions only):
n
Windows Server 2003 R2
n
Windows 2008 R2
n
Windows 2008
n
Windows 2012
One or more vCenter servers running any of the following versions:
n
vSphere 6.0 with vCenter 6.0
n
vSphere 6.0
n
vSphere 5.1 with ESX 5.1 and VC 5.1 U3
n
vSphere 5.5 with ESX 5.5 and vCenter 5.5
n
vSphere 5.0 with ESX 5.0 and vCenter 5.0
Note
NetWorker supports VMware vCenter appliance versions 5.0, 5.1, 5.5 and 6.0.
l
You must perform the following prerequisites on the NetWorker server/proxy machine
in order to run vSphere versions 5.5 and 6.0:
1. Since the registry key for SSL verification is not set by default, add the following
keypath in the registry:
'HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/SOFTWARE/Wow6432Node/VMware, Inc./VMware
Virtual Disk Development Kit'
Add a DWORD VerifySSLCertificates and set it to zero ('VerifySSLCertificates=0').
This will disable SSL verification for all VDDK Hotadd operations.
2. Install .NET framework 3.5.1 or later on the proxy. In Windows 2008 R2, even
though the .NET framework is bundled with the operating system, ensure that you
enable the framework under Server Manager- > features.
3. Install VC++ runtime 9.0 (VC++2008 SP1) on the proxy. The following link provides
more details:
http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=2092
The section Limitations to vSphere 5.5 and 6.0 support on page 140 provides
information on limitations when using vSphere 5.5 with the VADP solution.
138
l
Network connectivity must be available between the VADP proxy server and the
vCenter Server managing the ESX server cluster. It also requires connection to the ESX
server system.
l
To connect to a Fibre Channel (FC) SAN, the VADP proxy requires a FC host bus
adapter (HBA).
l
You must install the NetWorker 8.0 or later client software on the VADP Proxy host.
l
The NetWorker server requires NetWorker 8.0 or later software.
l
The VADP proxy host must have access to the LUNs required for backing up
supported VMs. Considerations vary depending on the environment, for example,
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
physical and virtual Compatibility RDMs are not supported and therefore do not
require proxy access. The section VADP proxy access to LUNs on page 183 provides
more information.
l
You must install VMware tools on the VM to ensure consistent state backups. Also,
backups via FQDN/hostname require VMware tools.
Note
The comreg.exe program, part of the VMware tools installer, contains a Windows
2008 R2 bug that prevents registration of the VMware Snapshot Provider with VSS.
VADP backups of a Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows 7 VM may fail for certain
versions of ESX 4.0.0 due to this issue.
The following knowledgebase article provides Instructions for fixing this issue:
http://kb.vmware.com/selfservice/microsites/search.do?
language=en_US&cmd=displayKC&externalId=1022720
To resolve this issue, upgrade to ESX 4.0 update 2 or ESX 4.1, or to upgrade your ESX
4.0.0 server with a VMware patch, navigate to the following link: http://
kb.vmware.com/selfservice/microsites/search.do?
cmd=displayKC&externalId=1013127.
Limitations and unsupported features
The following limitations apply to the VADP solution with NetWorker:
l
NetWorker supports the backup/recovery of non-English versions of guest operating
systems for the VMs. However, if using non-English versions of the Windows
operating system for the vCenter or VADP proxy host, note the limitations in the
sections Limitations to vCenter on non-English versions of Windows on page 139
and Limitation for VADP proxy host on non-English versions of Windows on page
140.
l
Global directives are not supported by NetWorker for VADP backup and recovery.
Both encryption and compression directives result in backup failure in *FULL* and
ALLVMFS workflows. FLR-disabled image backups complete successfully.
l
For image-level backups, an incremental backup of a VM is not supported after a
hardware change, OS patch update, Service Pack update, drivers update and so on.
Perform a full image-level backup after every change made at the operating system
and hardware level on the VM.
Limitations to vCenter on non-English versions of Windows
The following limitations apply to non-English versions of the Windows operating system
using vCenter for VADP:
l
l
The following names should always contain only English characters:
n
Backup VM display name in the left pane of vCenter
n
Backup VM hostname/FQDN
n
vCenter Datacenter name
n
vCenter Resource pool name
n
ESX datastore names containing the VM configuration files and virtual disks.
You can only restore VMs to the same language OS vCenter that you perform the
backup from. For example, you cannot recover a VM backed up from a Japanese OS
vCenter onto an English OS vCenter.
Limitations and unsupported features
139
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
l
You can only perform VADP recovery using the NetWorker User program. A command
line recovery of the entire image will not work for backups from a non-English
vCenter.
Limitation for VADP proxy host on non-English versions of Windows
The following limitation applies to non-English versions of the Windows operating system
for the VADP proxy host:
On the machine where you launch the VADP recovery, install the NetWorker package in
English only without any language packages. You must unselect all the other language
packages explicitly during the NetWorker installation.
Note
Attempting to launch the VADP recovery dialog without following this procedure results in
the overwriting of the local system files, which can lead to machine corruption.
Limitations to vSphere 5.5 and 6.0 support
The following limitations apply to vSphere 5.5 and 6.0 support with NetWorker:
l
VADP does not support backups to the vCenter server with the Transport Layer
Security (TLS) protocol in vSphere 6.0. In the vCenter Server Settings window, under
Advanced Settings set SSL version to either All or SSLv3.
l
Intermittent VADP backup failures occur when using NBDSSL as the transport mode. If
you restart the backup after the failure, the backup completes successfully. To ensure
the backup does not fail, use NBDSSL|NBD as the backup transport mode. When this
mode is specified, if NBDSSL fails at some point, the backup continues with NBD
mode.
l
When you run many backup processes at the same time, some of the processes
might crash with aSIGSEGV segmentation fault after many iterations due to a possible
race condition in VixDiskLib.
l
When using NBD transport mode, EMC recommends backing up no more than 4
clients in parallel. When you use NBD transport mode to back up more than four
VADP clients in parallel, the backup fails with a message indicating “Unable to
download config file with more than 5 clients parallel backups with NBD as transport
mode.”
Transport modes
The VADP proxy host supports advanced transport modes for image level recovery. You
can set the configured network transport mode to the following values during backup or
recovery:
l
SAN (Storage Area Network): selecting this mode completely offloads the backup
related CPU, memory or I/O load on the virtual infrastructure. The backup I/O is fully
offloaded to the storage layer where the data is read directly from the SAN or iSCSI
LUN.
SAN mode requires a physical proxy with SAN access, and the VMs need to be hosted
on either FibreChannel or iSCSI-based storage. The corresponding VMFS volumes
must be visible in the Microsoft Windows Disk Management snap-in of the VADP
proxy host.
l
140
Hotadd: in this mode, the backup related I/O happens internally through the ESX I/O
stack using SCSI hot-add technology. This provides better backup I/O rates than
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
NBD/NBDSSL. However, selecting this mode places backup related CPU, memory and
I/O load on the ESX hosting the VADP proxy.
Hotadd mode requires a virtual proxy, and the ESX hosting the virtual proxy should
have access to all the datastores where the VMs are hosted So, if the datastores are
SAN/iSCSI/NFS and if the ESX server where the VADP proxy resides is separate from
the ESX server where the VMs are hosted, then:
n
In the case of SAN LUNs the ESX hosting the proxy and the ESX hosting the VMs
should be part of the same fabric zones.
n
In the case of iSCSI LUNs the ESX hosting the proxy and the ESX hosting the VMs
should be configured for the same iSCSI-based storage targets.
n
In the case of NFS datastores, the ESX hosting the proxy and the ESX hosting the
VMs should be configured for the same NFS mount points.
l
NBD (Network Block Device): in this mode, the CPU, memory and I/O load gets
directly placed on the ESX hosting the production VMs, because the backup data has
to move through the same ESX and reach the proxy over the network. NBD mode can
be used either for physical or virtual proxy, and also supports all storage types.
l
NBDSSL (Network Block Device with SSL): NBDSSL transport mode is the same as
NBD except that the data transferred over the network is encrypted. Data transfer in
NBDSSL mode can therefore be slower and use more CPU due to the additional load
on the VADP host from SLL encryption/decryption.
For recovery of VMs using NBDSSL mode, refer to the section Recovering a VM using
NBDSSL, SAN, or Hotadd transport mode on page 167.
You can set multiple transport modes to be used by the VADP proxy host using the pipe
symbol “|” (for example, san|nbd|nbdssl).
By default, the transport mode field in the NetWorker User program is blank. Specify one
transport mode to use for recovery.
More information on configuring transport modes is provided inConfiguring the VADP
proxy host and Hypervisor resource on page 142. The transport modes are outlined in
the table Table 18 on page 145.
Changed Block Tracking (CBT)
VMs running on ESX 4.0 or later hosts with Virtual Hardware 7 can keep track of disk
sectors that have changed. This feature is called Changed Block Tracking (CBT).
On a virtual machine (VM), the virtual disk block changes are tracked from outside of the
VM in the virtualization layer. When a backup is performed, NetWorker uses CBT to
determine which files have changed since the last backup, and backs up only those files.
Check if your VM has CBT enabled, or enable CBT, by performing the steps outlined in
Configuring Changed Block Tracking (CBT) on page 157.
Independent persistent disks are not backed up
VADP does not support the backup and recovery of independent persistent disks. If
NetWorker detects these disks during backup, they are skipped and a message is logged
that indicates the disks were skipped. If using independent persistent disks, you must
use the traditional NetWorker style backup for protecting the data on the independent
persistent disks via the backup client installed inside the VM.
Changed Block Tracking (CBT)
141
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Configuration options
There are two options for configuring NetWorker clients for VADP backup. The
configuration can be performed automatically by using the Client Backup Configuration
wizard, or manually by using the Client Properties window:
l
If using the Client Backup Configuration wizard, refer to Configuring a VADP proxy
host and Hypervisor resource automatically by using the Client Backup Configuration
Wizard on page 142.
l
If using the Client Properties window, refer to Configuring a VADP proxy host and
Hypervisor resource manually by using nsradmin on page 144.
Configuring the VADP proxy host and Hypervisor resource
Backing up the VADP proxy host is not required. However, a NetWorker client must be
created for the VADP proxy host before configuring the virtual clients. The VADP proxy
NetWorker client will be referred to by VM clients during VADP backup and recovery
operations.
You can create a NetWorker client for the VADP proxy host by using one of the following
methods:
l
Configuring a VADP proxy host and Hypervisor resource automatically by using the
Client Backup Configuration Wizard on page 142
l
Configuring a VADP proxy host and Hypervisor resource manually by using
nsradmin on page 144
Note
The VADP proxy host can be the NetWorker server. Also, if multiple client instances of the
same VADP proxy host exist in the NetWorker server, ensure that all the instances have
the same application information attributes related to VADP. Manually copy the
application information attributes into all the VADP proxy client instances. Note, however,
that when a virtual proxy is used, it cannot be created by copying the template of other
VMs that are being protected.
Configuring a VADP proxy host and Hypervisor resource automatically by using the
Client Backup Configuration Wizard
Procedure
1. From the Administration window, click Configuration.
2. In the expanded left pane, right-click Clients and select Client Backup Configuration >
New.
The Specify Client Name and Type page displays, as shown in the following figure.
142
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Figure 50 Specify Client name and type
3. Type the name of the host machine in the Client Name field and select VMware proxy
host and click Next.
4. Select the vCenter server associated with the Proxy host if present, otherwise:
a. In the vCenter section, click New to create a new Hypervisor resource.
b. In the vCenter field, specify the hostname of the vCenter server.
Note
There is no limit to the number of vCenter servers supported; however, each
vCenter server must be created in the Hypervisor resource and each must be
associated with the appropriate proxy/proxies in the environment.
c. In the Username and Password field, type the username and password for an
account with permission to perform backups, snapshots and registering/creating a
new VM.
If the user has non-administrative privileges on the vCenter server, follow the steps
in the section Creating a VADP User role in vCenter on page 153.
d. Click OK.
Note
This will set the VADP_HOST variable in the Application Information properties of
the Proxy host client in NetWorker.
5. In the Filesystem Mount Point Options section, specify the directory where all the VM
backup jobs are supposed to reside in. The default value is c:\\mnt. This option will
set the VADP_BACKUPROOT variable in the Application Information properties of the
Proxy host client in NetWorker.
Consider the following when defining this option:
Configuring a VADP proxy host and Hypervisor resource automatically by using the Client Backup Configuration Wizard
143
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
l
Ensure that the directory already exists, otherwise the VADP backup jobs will fail
with “directory does not exist” error.
l
The directory must be on a local disk and not on a CIFS share.
l
This directory cannot be encrypted.
l
For each backup job, a directory with a unique name derived from the * backup
type and the VM name will be created here.
6. In the Retry Option selection, set the desired number of time to retry failures and the
wait time in between retries. These options will set the VADP_MAX_RETRIES and
VADP_MAX_BACKOFF_TIME variables respectively in the Application Information
properties of the Proxy host client in NetWorker.
Consider the following:
l
VADP_MAX_RETRIES - Use this option if you see a large number of backup jobs fail
with “resource busy” errors. Usually, backup software will retry failed jobs, but it
might be hours until the backup software retries.
l
VADP_MAX_BACKOFF_TIME - If you change this default, also change the default for
MAX_RETRIES, because this setting only applies if MAX_RETRIES is larger than 0).
7. In the Transport Mode Options section, select all desired modes in the Available
Modes section and click the button to add. Change the mode order if desired, the
order in which modes are specified dictate the priority in which they are attempted.
This option will set the VADP_TRANSPORT_MODE variable in the Application
Information properties of the Proxy host client in NetWorker.
Note
Each transport mode will be separated by a | when the variable is defined.
8. Click Next.
9. Click Next in the Specify the Proxy Host Backup option as it is not necessary to backup
the Proxy host.
10.Click Next and review the Backup Configuration Summary.
11.Click Create.
12.Click Finish.
Configuring a VADP proxy host and Hypervisor resource manually by using nsradmin
If vCenter is configured in the environment, there must be a Hypervisor resource for the
vCenter server hosting the VMs that use VADP. You may also need to create a Hypervisor
resource if you cannot use VMware View in the NetWorker VMware Protection solution, as
indicated in the section Enable VMware View in NMC after upgrading by creating a NSR
Hypervisor resource on page 45.
Before creating a Hypervisor resource for vCenter, ensure that the NetWorker client
software is installed on the vCenter server.
If vCenter is not configured in the environment, there must be a Hypervisor resource
created for each server in the environment.
VADP backups will work even if you do not install the NetWorker client on vCenter or
VirtualCenter, however, you must create the corresponding Hypervisor resource in the
NetWorker server prior to starting the VADP backups.
144
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Creating a Hypervisor resource from the NetWorker server
Procedure
1. Start the NetWorker administration program by running nsradmin. Use the help
command for help, or the visual command to enter full-screen mode.
2. Type the following:
nsradmin> create type:NSR Hypervisor;name:vCenter_FQDN_or_IP
nsradmin> vi
Select type: NSR hypervisor;
name: esx3-vc1.lss.emc.com;
comment: ;
service: [VMware VirtualCenter];
endpoint: "https://esx3-vc1.lss.emc.com/sdk";
username: "ajayads\\nemo"; ======================> vCenter info
password: *******;
command: nsrvim;
proxy: nemo220-3.lss.emc.com; ============> NW Server
Note
If using the NetWorker VMware Protection solution, ensure that the vCenter FQDN or IP
for the NSR Hypervisor resource matches what you specified in the vCenter
Registration page of the EMC Backup and Recovery Configure window. You must use
only FQDN or only IP in both instances, not a combination of the two.
Creating a NetWorker client for the VADP Proxy host by using the Client properties windows
Table 18 Application information values
Attribute name
Description
VADP_BACKUPROOT
l
VADP_DISABLE_FLR
Default value
C:\mnt
Directory in which all of the VM
backup jobs are supposed to
reside. Ensure that the directory
already exists or VADP backup
jobs will fail with “directory does
not exist” error.
l
The directory must be on a local
disk and not on a CIFS share.
l
This directory cannot be
encrypted.
l
For each backup job, a directory
with a unique name derived from
the * backup type and the VM
name will be created here.
l
"If omitted, BACKUPROOT
defaults to c:\\mnt.
Example:
VADP_BACKUPROOT=C:\\mnt"
If a virtual client is set up for image
level backup and image level
No
Configuring a VADP proxy host and Hypervisor resource manually by using nsradmin
145
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Table 18 Application information values (continued)
Attribute name
Description
Default value
recovery (single step), setting
VADP_DISABLE_FLR=Yes will disable
file level recoveries from the image
backup. This variable only takes
effect if the virtual client’s backup
saveset is specified as *FULL*, which
indicates an image level backup, and
the backup level is full (0) with no
incremental backup levels selected.
Setting this variable in the proxy
application information and not
specifying it at the virtual client level
will disable file level recovery from all
subsequent image backups done via
the proxy
Specify the hostname of the VC
VADP_HOST
This attribute is mandatory. server configured as part of the NSR
Hypervisor resource. If there are
multiple VC servers configured as
part of the NSR hypervisor resource,
specify their hostnames here.
Example:
VADP_HOST=any.vc
VADP_HOST=another.vc
VADP_MAX_RETRIES
Number of times an operation is retried after it fails. Use this option if
you see a large number of backup
jobs fail with "resource busy" errors.
Usually, backup software will retry
failed jobs, but it might be hours
until the backup software retries. For
example:
Example VADP_MAX_RETRIES=1
VADP_MAX_BACKOFF_TIME Number of seconds to wait before
retrying a failed operation. If you
change this default, also change the
default for MAX_RETRIES (because
this setting only applies if
MAX_RETRIES is larger than 0).
VADP_BACKOFF_TIME=20
10
VADP_TRANSPORT_MODE
blank
If left blank, the default
values are selected in the
order of the description list.
You can specify multiple
modes by inserting a pipe
( | ) symbol between each
Specify the transport mode to
transfer data from a VMFS data store
to a VADP proxy server. The following
options are supported:
l
146
0
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
SAN – Virtual disk data is read
directly off a shared storage
device that the virtual disk
resides on. This requires VMFS
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Table 18 Application information values (continued)
Attribute name
Description
storage on SAN or iSCSI and the
storage device has to be
accessible from both ESX and
the VADP proxy.
l
l
l
Hotadd – This mode can be used
when VADP is used in a virtual
proxy. Because it uses the ESX
I/O stack to move data, Hotadd
is more efficient than the
transport mode NBD.
Default value
value as shown in the
following:
Example:
VADP_TRANSPORT_MODE=
san | Hotadd | nbdssl | nbd
The order in which modes
are specified dictate the
priority in which they are
attempted. In the above
example, the san mode is
NBDSSL – This mode is the same attempted first; if that fails
as nbd except that the data
the Hotadd mode is
transferred over the network is
attempted, and so on.
encrypted. The data transfer in
nbdssl mode can be slower and
use more CPU than in the nbd
transport mode. Also, For
recovery of VMs using NBDSSL
mode, refer to the section
Recovering a VM using NBDSSL,
SAN, or Hotadd transport
mode on page 167 .
NBD – VADP will use an over-thenetwork protocol to access the
virtual disk. Data is read from the
storage device by the ESX host
and then sent across an
unencrypted network channel to
the VADP proxy. Please note that
this mode does not provide the
offload capabilities of the san
mode (because data is still
transferred from the ESX host
across the network). However,
nbd does not require shared
storage and also enables VADP
to be run inside a VM.
Example: Attribute values used for VADP configuration
The following example displays all the possible attribute values used for a VADP
configuration:
VADP_HOST=any.vc
VADP_HOST=another.vc
VADP_BACKUPROOT=G:\mnt
VADP_TRANSPORT_MODE=Hotadd
VADP_MAX_RETRIES=2
VADP_MAX_BACKOFF_TIME=15
Configuring a VADP proxy host and Hypervisor resource manually by using nsradmin
147
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Procedure
1. From the Administration window, click Configuration.
2. In the expanded left pane, select Clients.
3. From the File menu, select New.
4. In the Name attribute, type the hostname of the Proxy client.
5. The browse and retention policy fields can remain empty, as they are set for the virtual
clients.
6. If the Proxy client must be backed up, ensure that Scheduled Backups is selected.
Note
It is not mandatory to backup the Proxy client.
7. In the Save Set attribute, type the name of the files or directories to be backed up:
a. To specify a file or directory for backup such as C drive, type c:\.
b. To back up a specific directory such as Documents and Settings, type c:
\Documents and Settings.
c. To backup all file systems and VSS/System save sets, type ALL.
Note
If the Proxy client will not be backed up use the default selection.
8. Click Apps and Modules. The Create Client dialog displays, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 51 Apps and Modules tab in NMC
9. In the Application Information field, add one line for each VC server hostname that is
configured as part of the NSR Hypervisor resource:
VADP_HOST=any.vc
148
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
where any.vc is the hostname of the vCenter server configured as the NSR Hypervisor
resource.
10.The variables, described in the following table, can also be specified in the
Application Information section.
Configuring a virtual client for backup
You can configure a virtual client by using the Client Backup Configuration Wizard or by
using the Client Properties window. Using either method, you can create a new Client
resource or modify an existing one.
Complete the steps in one of the following topics depending on your environment:
l
Configuring a virtual client by using the Client Backup Configuration wizard on page
150
l
Configuring a virtual client manually by using the Client Properties window on page
152
VMware clients can also be configured as deduplication clients. After creating a VMware
client, follow the instructions in the NetWorker Data Domain Deduplication Devices
Integration Guide or the NetWorker Avamar Integration Guide to configure the appropriate
deduplication client.
After the virtual client has been backed up with the file level recovery option enabled, its
client index can be browsed, and data can be recovered directly to the virtual client or
data can be recovered onto a different virtual client using directed recovery.
Image level recovery of the full VM using the full image can also be performed. It can be
done to the same ESX server or to a different ESX server either within the same vCenter or
a different vCenter.
Note
Since index entries are required for VADP image level restores, ensure that the browse
policy is set appropriately. Index entries can still be created using the scanner command
after the browse policy has expired.
The following table lists the recovery options that are available based on the virtual
client’s configuration. Recovery steps are described in Recovering VADP Backups on page
158.
Table 19 Recovery options that are available based on the virtual client configuration
Backup Configuration
File level
recovery
Image level
(single step)
recovery
Virtual client with NTFS** OS and the ALLVMFS save set is
selected.
Yes
No
Virtual client with NTFS** OS and the *FULL* save set is
selected.
Yes
Yes
Virtual client with NTFS** OS and the *FULL* save set is
specified and the backup level is full (no incremental backups)
and the VADP_DISABLE_FLR APPINFO variable is set to Yes.*
No
Yes
Configuring a virtual client for backup
149
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Table 19 Recovery options that are available based on the virtual client configuration (continued)
Backup Configuration
File level
recovery
Image level
(single step)
recovery
Virtual clients that are not using the NTFS** OS and that have
the *FULL* save set selected.
No
Yes
*The VADP_DISABLE_FLR variable, if set to Yes, performs an image-level backup of the
entire VMDK file.
The VADP_DISABLE_FLR variable, if set to No (default), performs an image-level backup
using the VMware Virtual Disk Development Kit (VDDK), which performs file reads of the
VMDK data. Backup and recovery takes longer using this method due to the different
workflow to accommodate file level recovery.
The VADP_DISABLE_FLR variable does not apply to virtual clients that have the ALLVMFS
save set selected for backup. Additionally, if the VADP_DISABLE_FLR variable is specified
on both the virtual client and on the VADP proxy, the setting on the virtual client takes
precedence.
** NTFS implies NTFS of the following operating systems:
l
Windows 2003
l
Windows 2008
l
Windows 2008 R2
l
Windows Vista
l
Windows XP
l
Windows 7
Configuring a virtual client by using the Client Backup Configuration wizard
To configure a virtual client if vCenter is configured:
Procedure
1. Right-click on the VM and select Client Backup Configuration > New.
2. In the Specify the Client Name page, confirm that the client name field is populated
and VMware client is enabled. Click Next.
Note
The specified client name should be a recognized hostname/alias in a name service
and/or FQDN. If the VM display name appears in the field, this entry must be changed
to the hostname or FQDN or client creation will fail.
3. In the Specify the VMware Physical Host and Backup Type page, the Physical Host
field will be populated with the Physical Host for the VM.
4. Select VMware Proxy backup and from the Proxy host list, select the name of the
Proxy Host VC Server. The VC names are taken from the multiple VADP_HOST values
set on the Application Information section of the proxy Client resource. Click Next.
5. In the Specify the Backup Options page, complete the following optional sections if
required:
l
150
Deduplication — Select Data Domain if this client is being used with the DD Boost
option that is available in NetWorker 7.6 SP1 and later. Select Avamar
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
deduplication backup and the corresponding Avamar server from the list if this
client is using Avamar deduplication. Select None if no deduplication is being
used.
l
Target Pool — Select a pool, from the list, to which data from this client’s backup
will be directed. If a pool is selected, this value will override any other pool
selection criteria that is associated with the client’s backup group or the client’s
save sets. This field is most often used when backing up to a NetWorker 7.6 SP1 or
higher Data Domain device.
6. Click Next to display the Specify the Proxy Backup Options page.
7. (Optional) In the Virtual Machine Name field, type the display name of the VM used in
the vCenter. If a value is not entered, backups for this VM will be done by IP address.
If a name is entered in this field, the name must match the display name as seen in
vCenter Administrator, otherwise the backup will fail.
Note
This name is case-sensitive. Also, if the name of the VM contains spaces, then the
name should be enclosed in double quotes "".
8. In the Backup Type section, specify the desired backup:
l
Image level backup (this is equivalent to saveset *FULL*).
l
Backup all files (this is equivalent to saveset ALLVMFS).
l
Backup Specific files and folders.
n
To specify a file or directory for backup such as C: drive, enter c:\ or c:.
n
To back up a specified directory, such as Documents and Settings, enter c:
\Documents and Settings.
Note
Due to limits with VADP, only one entry is allowed for the Save Set attribute.
9. Click Next.
10.In the Select NetWorker Client Properties section, select the Browse and Retention
policies from the drop down menus.
11.If desired, select the Backup Schedule for this client.
Note
If a backup schedule is also defined for the backup group that this client will be
added to, the group schedule will override the client schedule.
12.Type a description of the client in the Client Comment field, if desired.
13.If the NetWorker server and VADP proxy client are two different machines, in the
Remote access field specify:
user=system, host=VADP proxy host
Where system is the system account of the Windows VADP proxy and VADP proxy host
is the name of the Proxy host.
14.Click Next.
Configuring a virtual client by using the Client Backup Configuration wizard
151
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
15.In Specify the NetWorker Backup Group, choose the desired group or select Create a
new group and provide a group name and desired number of client retries.
16.If a new group is created, in the Schedule Options section, specify the desired time for
the group to start in the Schedule backup start time field and enable Automatically
start the backup at the scheduled time.
17.Click Next.
18.In the Backup Storage Nodes section, select the storage nodes that contain the
devices to which the backups will be directed.
19.In the Recovery Storage Nodes section, select the storage nodes whose available
devices will be used for recovery operations.
20.Click Next.
21.Review the backup configuration summary and click Create.
You can now enable a directive on the VM.
22.Click Clients, right-click the newly created VM client, and select Properties.
23.From the Directive list, select Encryption directive or NT with compression directive.
24.Click the Apps and Modules tab and ensure that nsrvadp_save is in the Backup
command field.
25.Click OK.
Results
More information on directives is provided in the NetWorker Administration Guide.
Configuring a virtual client manually by using the Client Properties window
To configure a virtual client by using the Client Properties window:
Procedure
1. From the Administration window, click Configuration.
2. In the expanded left pane, select Clients.
3. From the File menu, select New.
4. In the Name attribute, type the hostname of the client.
5. In the Browse Policy field, select a browse policy from the list.
Note
If the browse policy is set at the client level, it will override the browse policy specified
for any groups to which this client is a member.
6. In the Retention Policy field, select a retention policy from the list.
Note
If the retention policy is set at the client level, it will override the retention policy
specified for any groups to which this client is a member.
7. Ensure Scheduled Backups is selected.
8. In the Save Set attribute, type the name of the files or directories to be backed up.
152
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Note
Due to limitations with VADP, only one entry is allowed for the Save Set attribute.
a. To specify a file or directory for backup such as C drive, type c:\.
b. To back up a specific directory such as Documents and Settings, type c:
\Documents and Settings.
c. To backup all VM file systems, type ALLVMFS.
d. To backup up the entire VM image, type *FULL*.
9. From the Directive attribute, select a directive from the list, if desired.
10.Click the Apps and Modules tab.
11.In the Backup Command field, type nsrvadp_save.
12.In the Application Information field add a value VADP_HYPERVISOR to indicate which
vCenter server to use for communication. For example:
VADP_HYPERVISOR=vCenter1
Where vCenter1 is the name of the vCenter server.
Also add this value for the VADP_VM_NAME attribute.
Note
VADP_VM_NAME is case-sensitive, so the VM host name must be entered as it is
displayed (for example, SUSE11-X86). Also, if the name of the VM contains spaces,
then the VADP_VM_NAME should be enclosed in double quotes "".
13.Select VADP for the Proxy backup type field.
14.If the NetWorker Server and VADP proxy client are on two different machines:
a. Click on the Globals (2 of 2) tab.
b. In the Remote access field specify:
user=system, host=VADP proxy host
Where system is the system account of the Windows VADP proxy andVADP proxy
host is the name of the Proxy host.
15.Click OK.
Creating a VADP User role in vCenter
The following section provides the steps required to create a VADP User role in the
vCenter server. Although it is possible to run VADP backup/recovery using Administrator
privileges on vCenter, this is not recommended from a security perspective. It is
recommended to create a new role specific to VADP in the vCenter server and assign it to
the user specified in the Hypervisor resource.
Creating a VADP Proxy role
The section Minimum vCenter permissions needed to back up and recover using VADP on
page 154 provides more information.
Creating a VADP User role in vCenter
153
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Procedure
1. Log in to the vCenter Server with Administrator privileges using vSphere Client.
2. From the vCenter Server, select View > Administration > Roles.
3. Click Add Role.
4. Name the role VADP User.
5. Assign the required permissions to the VADP User role and click OK.
Assigning the VADP User role to the user specified in the NetWorker Hypervisor
resource
Note
Refer the appropriate VMware Basic System Administration or Datacenter Administration
Guide documentation for steps to assign a role to user.
VMware documentation can be found at http://www.vmware.com/support/pubs/
Procedure
1. Log in to the vCenter Server with Administrator privileges using vSphere Client.
2. Select the vCenter server in the left pane.
3. Click the Permissions tab in the right pane.
4. Right-click inside the right pane and select Add Permission.
5. Add the NetWorker Hypervisor user and assign the VADP User role.
6. Ensure Propagate to Child Objects is enabled and click OK.
Minimum vCenter permissions needed to back up and recover using VADP
EMC recommends creating a single VADP User role with the backup and recovery
privileges specified in the following tables. You can then use the associated user for
VADP backup and recovery operations.
The following table provides VADP backup privileges.
Table 20 VADP backup privileges
Setting
Privileges
Virtual machine > Configuration
l
Add existing disk
l
Add or Remove device
l
Change Resource
l
Disk Change Tracking
l
Disk Lease
l
Raw device
l
Remove disk
l
Settings
l
Allow disk access
l
Allow read-only disk access
Virtual machine > Provisioning
154
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Table 20 VADP backup privileges (continued)
Setting
Privileges
l
Allow virtual machine download
l
Create snapshot
l
Remove snapshot
l
Browse datastore
l
Low level file operations
Session
l
Validate session
Global
l
Cancel task
l
Licenses
l
Log Event
l
Settings
l
Create task
l
Update task
Virtual machine > Snapshot Management
Datastore
Tasks
The following table provides VADP recovery privileges.
Table 21 VADP recovery privileges
Setting
Privileges
Global
l
Cancel task
l
Licenses
l
Log Event
l
Settings
Resource
l
Assign virtual machine to resource pool
Datastore
l
Allocate space
l
Browse datastore
l
Low level file operations
l
Remove file
l
Update virtual machine files (only found in 4.1 and later)
l
Create new
l
Register
l
Remove
l
Unregister
l
Add existing disk
l
Add new disk
Virtual machine > Inventory
Virtual machine > Configuration
Minimum vCenter permissions needed to back up and recover using VADP
155
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Table 21 VADP recovery privileges (continued)
Setting
l
Add or Remove device
l
Advanced
l
Change CPU count
l
Change Resource
l
Disk change Tracking
l
Disk Lease
l
Extend virtual disk
l
Host USB device
l
Memory
l
Modify device setting
l
Raw device
l
Reload from path
l
Remove disk
l
Rename
l
Reset guest information
l
Settings
l
Swapfile placement
l
Upgrade virtual machine compatibility
l
Power Off
l
Power On
l
Reset
l
Allow disk access
l
Allow read-only disk access
l
Allow virtual machine download
l
Create snapshot
l
Remove snapshot
l
Revert to snapshot
l
Assign network
l
Configure
Session
l
Validate session
Tasks
l
Create task
l
Update task
Virtual machine > Interaction
Virtual machine > Provisioning
Virtual machine > State
Network
156
Privileges
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Configuring Changed Block Tracking (CBT)
You can check if your VM has CBT enabled or enable/disable CBT by setting the variable
VADP_DISABLE_CBT, or by using the command line executable, nsrvadp_modify_vm.exe.
Note
When Changed Block tracking (CBT) is enabled, incremental and differential backups are
supported only for Windows VMs, and all attached disks must be NTFS file systems.
Note also that CBT-based incremental backups are always file based. Image level
recovery from a CBT-based incremental backup is not supported.
Configuring CBT using the variable VADP_DISABLE_CBT
Setting the variable VADP_DISABLE_CBT allows you to control the enabling or disabling of
CBT. This option is available in NetWorker 8.0 SP1 and later.
Setting VADP_DISABLE_CBT = YES disables CBT. CBT will not be used for incremental
backups.
Setting VADP_DISABLE_CBT = NO enables CBT prior to performing image backups.
Handling of FLR based incremental backups does not change.
Note
If VADP_DISABLE_CBT is not configured, no attempt is made to enable CBT before
performing image backups. Handling of FLR based incremental backups does not change.
Configuring CBT using the nsrvadp_modify_vm command
From the command line, the executable nsrvadp_modify_vm.exe allows you to enable
CBT, disable CBT, or view the CBT properties for a specified VM. The VM can be specified
using either the IP, DNS or VM name. If the VM is running when the executable is run,
then a snapshot will be created and deleted so that any changes made to CBT can take
effect.
From the command line, specify the following format:
directory>nsrvadp_modify_vm.exe -H vCenter server -P protocol -u user
-p password -l lookup method -k lookup key -c command
Where:
l
directory is the location of the executable (for example, c:\bin\nw762\nsr\bin)
l
vCenter server is the vCenter server hostname
l
protocol is the protocol to use with the web service. Can be one of the following:
n
http
n
https
l
user is the vCenter user name
l
password is the vCenter user password
l
lookup method is the lookup method to use. Can be one of the following:
n
vm-name
Configuring Changed Block Tracking (CBT)
157
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
n
ip-addr
n
dns-name
l
lookup key is the lookup key to use
l
command is where you specify one of the following CBT options:
n
cbt-disable
n
cbt-enable
n
info
In the following example, the command line interface is used to enable CBT on a VM
vm31-w2k3x64:
c:\bin\nw_762\nsr\bin>nsrvadp_modify_vm.exe -H 10.13.187.212 -P https
-u administrator -p password1 -l vm-name -k vm31-w2k3x64 -c cbt-enable
Enabling CBT using the vSphere Client GUI
It is recommended to use the command line tool to enable CBT. If, however, the
command line tool does not work properly, CBT can be enabled using the vSphere Client
GUI. The VMware vSphere documentation provides more details.
Monitor VMs
Monitoring of VMs, including notification when there is a new VM, can be done through
NMC in the same manner used to monitor other events. The NetWorker Administration
Guide provides information on monitoring.
Launching the vSphere Web Client from the NetWorker Console
(Windows only)
On supported Windows platforms, you can launch the vSphere Web Client from the
NetWorker Console’s Configuration window using the main menu.
Procedure
1. Start the Console, then click the Configuration tab.
2. Highlight the desired client in the left panel.
3. Launch the vSphere client by selecting Configuration > Launch vSphere Web Client.
Recovering VADP Backups
This section covers these topics:
158
l
File based recovery of a VM on page 159
l
Image level (single step) recovery of a full VM on page 160
l
Recovery of pre-NetWorker 7.6 SP2 VM backups on page 168
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
File based recovery of a VM
File-level recovery (FLR) is supported only on VMs that have a Windows operating system
with the NTFS file system. FLR is not supported in the following configurations:
l
Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012 VMs with Resilient File System (ReFS)
l
VM operating system containing dynamic disks
l
VM operating system containing uninitialized disks
l
VM operating system containing unformatted partitions
l
VM operating system containing partitions without drive letters
l
VM configuration with Virtual IDE Disk Devices (only SCSI)
l
VM configuration with independent disk mode
Performing a file based recovery on the local host
File based recovery on the local host running a VM client requires that the NetWorker
client is installed on the VADP proxy.
To perform a file based recovery on the local host:
Procedure
1. Launch the NetWorker User program on the VM client.
2. Follow the procedure outlined in the NetWorker Administration Guide’s Recovery
chapter. Make sure to specify the restore path using the Recover Options dialog,
illustrated in the following figure.
If you click OK without specifying a restore path in the Recover Options dialog, a
warning message displays, indicating that restoring data to the proxy storage node
from the VM image can result in overwriting system files. To ensure overwriting of files
does not occur, enter a restore path prior to clicking OK.
Figure 52 Recover Options dialog
File based recovery of a VM
159
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Performing a file based recovery using CIFS share
Before you begin
Ensure that the remote access list of the VM client includes either user@server or
user@proxy and that you add the proxies to the DD Boost access list. To add a client to
the DDBoost access list, run the following command from the DDBoost command line:
ddboost access add clients (- Add clients to a DD Boost access list)
ddboost access add clients client-list
Procedure
1. Launch the NetWorker User program on the NetWorker server or VADP proxy.
2. Browse the file system for the VM client and select file to recover, as outlined in the
NetWorker Administration Guide’s Recovery chapter.
3. Set the destination directory to the CIFS share of the VM client.
4. Recover the files onto the CIFS share.
5. At the VM client, move the files from the CIFS share to the appropriate directory.
Performing a file based recovery using directed recovery
File based recovery using directed recovery requires that the NetWorker client is installed
on the VM client.
Procedure
1. Launch the NetWorker User program on the NetWorker server or VM client.
Note
The user must have the Remote Access All Clients privilege.
2. Select the VM client as the source client.
3. Select the target client as VM-client.
4. Select a destination folder.
5. Follow the procedure in the NetWorker Administration Guide’s Recovery chapter to
select files for recovery and perform the recovery.
Image level (single step) recovery of a full VM
This section describes how to perform an image level recovery (disaster recovery) of the
full VM. There are two methods of recovering a full VM:
l
Performing an image level recovery from the NetWorker User program on page 161
l
Performing an image level recovery from the command line on page 163
Recommendations and considerations
The following considerations apply when performing an image level recovery of a full
VMware VM:
160
l
For a remote VADP proxy client, image level recovery requires the members of the
VADP proxy client’s administrator group to be part of the remote access list of the VM
clients or the member should have the “Remote access all clients” privilege.
l
The user must have VMware privileges to register or create VMs.
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
l
Recovery of the full VM is only supported using save set recovery.
l
Only level FULL of FULLVM save sets are supported for VM image recovery.
l
The VMware converter must be installed on the VADP proxy host machine if you need
to recover backups made prior to NetWorker 7.6 Service Pack 2. If the VMware
converter is not installed, the save set of the full VM (FULLVM save set) can be
recovered using a traditional NetWorker recovery.
Note
Image level recovery is only supported with VMware stand-alone converter version
3.0.3.
l
The VADP proxy system must be running one of the following:
n
Microsoft Windows 2003 (with at least SP1 installed)
n
Microsoft Windows 2003 R2
n
Microsoft Windows 2008
n
Microsoft Windows 2008 R2
n
Microsoft Windows 2012
l
If any hardware level changes such as a new disk partition, are made to the VM, you
must perform a level full backup before you can perform an image level recovery of
the full VM.
l
The VM can recover to the same VMware ESX server or VMware vCenter (VC) taken at
the time of backup or to a different ESX or VC. Recovery to different resource pools
and different datastores are also supported. A different datastore can be specified for
each disk and a configuration datastore can be specified to restore the configuration
files.
l
During the recovery of a full VM (FULLVM save set), the recovered VM will start in
forceful powered off state because of a VADP snapshot limitation.
l
For non-Windows VMs: If using traditional NetWorker client-based backups along
with VADP image based backups for the same VM client, ensure that the browse
policy for the client-based backups does not exceed the frequency of VADP image
based backups. This practice is recommended because the indices of client-based
backups may have to be removed prior to image-level recovery. The section Image
level recovery to a different FARM or vCenter on page 166 provides more details.
For example, a Linux client has a schedule of daily level FULL client-based backups
along with monthly VADP image based backups. In this case, it is recommended to
set the browse policy of the client-based backups to a maximum of 1 month.
l
If the image level backup of the VM being recovered was performed with the
Encryption directive, the current Datazone pass phrase by default is automatically
used to recover the VM image. If the current Datazone pass phrase was created after
a password-protected backup was performed, you must provide the password that
was in effect when the VM image was originally backed up.
Performing an image level recovery from the NetWorker User program
This procedure is supported on Windows XP and later Windows platforms only.
To perform an image level recovery of a full VM to the VMware ESX server or VMware
vCenter server:
Procedure
1. Launch the NetWorker User program on the NetWorker client or VADP proxy.
Image level (single step) recovery of a full VM
161
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
2. From the Operation menu, select Save Set Recover.
3. In the Source Client dialog box, select the VM client from where the save set
originated and click OK.
4. In the Save Sets dialog box, select the Save Set name for the full VM backup client
(FULLVM) and select a level FULL backup. Click OK.
Note
Only level full of FULLVM save sets are supported for VM image restore.
5. In the VADP Restore dialog box, type the following information depending on the type
of recovery and then click the Start button.
Restore to VMware vCenter (VC):
l
VM DISPLAY NAME- Specify a new VM name to restore the backed up VM.
l
vCenter Server - Specify the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) or the IP address
of the VC server.
l
Data Center Name - Specify the name of the Data Center to use.
l
ESX Server - Specify the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) or the IP address of
the ESX Server on which to perform the restore. By default, the source ESX server is
displayed in this field.
l
Config Data Store - Specify the name of the datastore to which the VM
configuration data will be restored.
l
Resource Pool Name - Specify the resource pool to use for the restore. Leave this
field empty to use the default pool.
l
Transport Mode - Specify the transport mode for recovery (SAN, Hotadd or NBD).
Note
NBDSSL mode fails for recovery of VMs in NetWorker. The transport mode Hotadd
fails for ESX 5.0 and with VC 5.0. Recovering a VM using NBDSSL, SAN, or Hotadd
transport mode on page 167 provides a workaround to this issue.
l
Data Store — Specify the name of the datastore for each disk on the VM.
Results
The following figure depicts a VADP Restore dialog box that is set up for a VMware
vCenter restore.
162
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Figure 53 VMware vCenter restore
Note
During an image level recovery operation, multiple browse sessions will be displayed in
NMC’s Monitoring window. This is expected behavior.
Performing an image level recovery from the command line
The following describes how to perform a command line recover of a full VM to the
VMware ESX server or VMware vCenter (VC) server.
Procedure
1. Use the mminfo command to determine the save set ID of the level FULL FULLVM
backup, for example:
mminfo -avot -q "name=FULLVM,level=full"
Note
Only level FULL of FULLVM save sets are supported for VM image recovery.
2. Recover the full VM using the recover command, for example:
recover -S ssid [-d staging-location] -o VADP:host=VC
hostname[:port];VADP:transmode=transport mode;VADP:datacenter=datacenter
name;VADP:resourcepool=resource pool name; VADP:hostsystem=ESX
hostname;VADP:datastore=datastores
where
l
ssid is the save set identifier of the FULLVM.
l
staging-location is the staging location path to recover the FULLVM image to the
proxy. This value is needed only for a recovery to staging location and applies only
to backups taken before NetWorker 7.6 SP2.
l
VC hostname is the VMware VC name that is used to perform the restore.
l
port is the port used to log in to the web server of the VC host. If no value is
entered, the default port number is used.
l
transport mode is the transport mode to use for recovery. For example,SAN.
l
datacenter name is the data center name where the VM is restored to.
Image level (single step) recovery of a full VM
163
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
l
resource pool name is the resource pool that the restored VM is connected to.
l
ESX hostname is the VMware ESX server machine name where the VMware VM
needs to be restored.
l
datastores is the list of datastores that need to be associated with the
configuration and the disks of the VM that is being restored. They are name / value
pairs separated with hash (#) symbols. For example:
VADP:datastore=”config=stor1#disk1=stor2#disk2=stor3”
The following command depicts a command to recover the FULLVM with a ssid of
413546679. The recovery is directed to the ESX server named
esxDemo1.emc.com. Default values are used for the datacenter, resource pool,
and datastores.
recover.exe -S 413546679 -o
VADP:host=esxDemo1.emc.com;
VADP:transmode=Hotadd
Recover VMs that have a mix of VADP image-level and traditional guest based backups
If your VMs have a mix of both VADP image level backups and traditional guest based
(also known as client based) backups, you may have to use one of the following recovery
procedures depending on the build number of your NetWorker software:
l
Image-level recoveries of non-Windows VMs on page 164
This issue applies only to NetWorker 7.6.2 build 631 or earlier.
l
Unable to browse guest based backups on non NTFS file systems on page 165
This issue applies only to NetWorker 7.6.2.1 build 638 or later.
Image-level recoveries of non-Windows VMs
The following considerations apply to NetWorker releases 7.6.2 build 631 and earlier
when recovering non-Windows VMs that have a mix of VADP image-level and guest based
(client based) backups.
If using traditional NetWorker guest based backups along with VADP image-based
backups for the same VM client, then you must first remove the indices of the previous
traditional save sets before you can perform an image-level recovery of the full VM,
otherwise the image-level recovery will fail. The only indices that need to be removed are
those indices of the traditional save sets whose backups were performed prior to the
VADP image-level backup that you have selected for restore.
Run the following command on the NetWorker server to mark the browsable save sets
corresponding to the traditional backup as recoverable save sets.
nsrim -c client_name -N traditional_saveset_name -l
The last parameter in the command is a lower-case L.
This command removes the oldest full save and all dependent save sets from the online
index. You may need to run the command multiple times for every level FULL browsable
traditional save set and for every traditional save set name.
After removing the indices, you can perform the image-level recovery using either the
NetWorker User program or the command line.
Removing indices of browsable save sets
For example, a Linux client mars has a mix of both VADP image-level and traditional
backups as seen in the following output:
C:\>mminfo -avot -q "client=mars,volume=delve.001"
164
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
volume type client date time size ssid fl lvl name
delve.001 adv_file mars 4/14/2011 9:55:55 AM 3483 MB 4154881857 cb full /usr
delve.001 adv_file mars 4/14/2011 10:01:35 PM 103 MB 3953675679 cb incr /usr
delve.001 adv_file mars 4/14/2011 10:07:10 AM 15 GB 4104550902 cb full FULLVM
delve.001 adv_file mars 4/14/2011 2:55:31 PM 3481 MB 4003904887 cb full /usr
delve.001 adv_file mars 4/14/2011 3:03:18 PM 103 MB 3903242058 cb incr /usr
delve.001 adv_file mars 4/14/2011 3:28:30 PM 15 GB 3852911942 cb full FULLVM
If you want to recover the latest image-level backup (in the above example,
SSID=3852911942), first remove all the indices of browsable save sets that are from the
previous traditional backups.
In this case, because there are two instances of browsable level FULL of the save set
name /usr that need to be removed, the following command must be run twice on the
NetWorker server:
nsrim -c mars -N /usr -l
If you want to recover from the second last image-level backup, (for example, from
SSID=4104550902), first remove all the indices of browsable save sets which are from
the previous traditional backups.
In this case, because there is one instance of browsable level FULL for the save set
name /usr that needs to be removed, the following command must be run once on the
NetWorker server:
nsrim -c mars -N /usr -l
Note
Browsable recovery of the traditional backup save sets will no longer be possible after
the respective indexes are removed. If the traditional backup indexes are still needed,
they can be restored after the image-level recovery is complete by running the following
command on the NetWorker server:
scanner -c <client name> -i <device path>
For example: scanner -c mars -i c:\device2
Unable to browse guest based backups on non NTFS file systems
The following issue applies to NetWorker releases 7.6.2.1 build 638 and later. Traditional
guest based (client based) backups are not browsable in the recovery GUI for VMs that
are running a non NTFS file system and that have a mix of VADP and guest based
backups. This issue does not apply to Windows VMs that are using NTFS. Additionally,
save set recoveries are not affected and can be performed in the usual way.
To work around the issue, a command line recovery that specifies the backup time must
be performed. Run the following commands from a command line on the VADP proxy or
the VM:
To find the backup time:
mminfo -av -s networker_server -q "client=virtual_client"
Image level (single step) recovery of a full VM
165
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
To perform the recovery:
recover -t backup_time -s networker_server -c virtual_client
Example
The following VM (host name mars) has a mix of both VADP and traditional guest based
backups. This example shows how to recover a traditional backup save set on the VM by
first locating the time of the backup save set using the mminfo command and then by
using that time with the recover command. The host name of the NetWorker server in this
example is jupiter.
C:\mminfo -av -s jupiter -q "client=mars"
volume type client date time size ssid fl lvl name
kuma-1 Data Domain mars 5/24/2011 10:38:39 PM 281 MB 1658578527 cb full /root
kuma-1.RO Data Domain mars 5/24/2011 10:38:39 PM 281 MB 1658578527 cb full /
root
kuma-6 Data Domain mars 5/24/2011 10:59:22 PM 5243 MB 1440475890 cb full
FULLVM
kuma-6.RO Data Domain mars 5/24/2011 10:59:22 PM 5243 MB 1440475890 cb full
FULLVM
C:\recover -t "5/24/2011 10:38:39 PM" -s jupiter -c mars
Notice that in the previous example output from the mminfo command, the first two lines
listed are for traditional backup and the last two lines are for a VADP backup, which is
denoted with the save set name, FULLVM. The NetWorker Command Reference Guide
provides more information about using the recover command to mark (select) files and to
perform the recovery.
Image level recovery to a different FARM or vCenter
When recovering to a different server within the same vCenter environment, or when
recovering to a different server within a different vCenter environment, you must select
whether to keep the same UUID, or create a new UUID.
When you start a VM that was restored to a new location, the following message displays:
In ESX/ESXi 3.x:
The virtual machine's configuration file has changed its location
since its last poweron. Do you want to create a new unique identifier
(UUID) for the virtual machine or keep the old one?
* Create
* Keep
* Always Create
* Always Keep
If you choose to keep the UUID, select Keep, then click OK to continue starting the VM.
If you choose to create a new UUID, Select Create, then click OK to continue powering on
the VM.
In ESX/ESXi 4.x:
Question (id = 0) : msg.uuid.altered:This virtual machine might have
been moved or copied.
In order to configure certain management and networking features,
VMware ESX needs to know if this virtual machine was moved or copied.
* Cancel
166
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
* I moved it
* I copied it
If you choose to keep the UUID, select I moved it, then click OK to continue starting the
VM.
If you choose to create a new UUID, select I copied it, then click OK to continue powering
on the VM.
Recovering a VM using NBDSSL, SAN, or Hotadd transport mode
Recovery of a VM in NetWorker fails for the transport modes NBDSSL, SAN, and for
Hotadd mode for ESX 5.0 and with VC 5.0. Use the following steps to work around the
issue:
Note
Before performing the following steps, ensure that you delete any snapshots that are
active on the VM. Do not power on the VM until these steps have been performed.
Procedure
1. Right click the VM and select Edit settings.
2. Select the virtual hard disk and select Remove but do not delete the VMDK. Click OK.
3. Return to the Edit settings menu and select Add.
4. Choose Hard Disk and use an existing virtual disk.
5. Associate the new hard disk with the VMDK file, then click OK. For example, use the
Add disk pop-up window and add the hard disks by pointing them to the correct
VMDK file in the datastore.
6. Power on the VM.
Recovering a VM using SAN or Hotadd transport mode on Windows 2008
Note
Windows 2008 32-bit can only be used as VADP proxy, not as the NetWorker server.
When recovering a VM using either the san or Hotadd transport mode on a Windows 2008
system, perform the following one-time configuration on the proxy host before initiating
the recovery:
Procedure
1. Open a command prompt on the proxy host.
2. Run the following command:
DISKPART
3. Enter SAN and check for the SAN policy.
4. If the policy indicates offline, enable the policy by entering the following:
SAN POLICY=OnlineALL
Image level (single step) recovery of a full VM
167
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Note
After the recovery is successful, SAN POLICY can be changed back to the default value
(SAN POLICY=offline or SAN POLICY=offlineshared).
5. Restart the proxy for the change to take effect.
Results
You can now initiate the VM recovery using san or Hotadd mode.
Note
If recovery is initiated from a Windows machine other than the proxy, these steps need to
be performed on the machine where the recovery is initiated.
Recovery of pre-NetWorker 7.6 SP2 VM backups
To recover backups of VMs that were performed via VCB, install VMware Converter 4.0.1
on the machine where the restore will be initiated. This allows you to perform a 2-step
recovery, for example, first to a staging location, and then manually through the VMware
Converter 4.0.1.
Note
You can only perform single Step recovery of VCB backups when VMware Converter 3.0.3
is installed, however, due to the incompatibility of this version with vSphere 4.0/4.1,
EMC recommends not using Single Step recovery when recovering old VCB backups to a
vSphere host. Note also that VMware Converter 4.0.1 is the last version that supports
VCB. The knowledgebase article at http://kb.vmware.com/selfservice/microsites/
search.do?language=en_US&cmd=displayKC&externalId=1026944provides more
information.
VADP Planning and Best Practices
This section covers topics related to best practices when using VADP.
Recommendations and considerations for VADP backup and recovery
Be aware of the following recommendations and considerations before implementing
VADP backup and recovery.
l
Ensure that VC and ESX/ESXi are updated to the latest released update.
l
VADP supports backup and recovery via VMware VirtualCenter or vCenter. The section
Software and hardware requirements on page 138 provides more information on
supported vCenter versions.
Note
Backup and recovery directly to a standalone ESX/ESXi host is not supported. The
ESX/ESXi must be connected to either VirtualCenter or vCenter to perform backup and
recovery operations.
l
168
VADP does not support IPv6. Instructions for disabling IPv6 and using IPv4 are
provided in the section Network and Firewall port requirements on page 175
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
l
Ensure that the client parallelism on the VADP proxy machine is set to the maximum
number of VM backups to be run concurrently. The section Recommendations and
considerations for transport modes on page 179 provides information on the
maximum supported concurrent backups for each transport mode.
For example if running 10 VM backups simultaneously, ensure that the client
parallelism in the VADP proxy Client resource is set to 10.
l
It is recommended to keep the vCenter and VADP proxy as separate machines to
avoid contention of CPU and memory resources.
l
The vSphere client does not need to be installed on the NetWorker server.
l
In previous NetWorker releases using VCB, extra space was required for the mount
point on the VCB proxy for copy operations during backup and recovery. NetWorker
releases using the VADP proxy require significantly less space. The section VADP
mount point recommendations and space considerations on page 177 provides
more information.
l
Ensure the path specified in VixDisklib and VixMountAPI config files are enclosed in
double quotes as below:
tempDirectory="C:\Program Files\EMC NetWorker\nsr\plugins\VDDK\tmp"
These files are stored in the following location by default:
<NetWorker install folder>\nsr\plugins\VDDK\
Note
Double quotes should be specified in the path even though the path is already
present.
l
EMC recommends using the VADP proxy host as the storage node. This provides the
optimal configuration for any given transport mode as data transfer occurs directly
from the ESX/ESXi datastore to the storage node.
Application-level consistent backups
Performing a backup using VMware VADP creates a crash-consistent snapshot of a VM
image. However, advanced VMware functionality allows a backup application using VADP
to achieve application-level consistent backups.
When performing a full VMware backup using VADP, in addition to VM quiescing, vSphere
version 4.1 and later provides application quiescing using VSS on Windows 2008 and
later platforms. This functionality requires that VMware tools is installed on the VM guest.
If VMware tools is not installed, there is no backup integration with the VSS framework
and backups are considered crash-consistent.
If the VM was created using a Windows 2008 template, then no additional configuration
is required. If the VM was created using a non-standard template, or the configuration
was manually modified, you must enable application-consistent quiescing by modifying
the following line in the VM’s configuration file (.vmx):
disk.EnableUUID = "true"
Further information is provided in the following VMware knowledge base article:
http://kb.vmware.com/selfservice/microsites/search.do?
cmd=displayKC&docType=kc&docTypeID=DT_KB_1_1&externalId=1028881
The only VSS backup type supported by vSphere is VSS_BT_COPY. As a result, the
application backup history will not be updated and no additional application integration
(such as Exchange log truncation) will be performed. Further details on backup type
Application-level consistent backups
169
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
VSS_BT_COPY and its use in different applications is provided in the MSDN
documentation.
Note
Due to the number of issues related to VMware Tools, for VSS integration the minimum
recommended version of VMware is ESX 4.1 Update 1.
Option to enable or skip quiescing on the Application Information tab in NMC
An option on the Application Information tab in NMC allows you to enable or skip
quiescing during VADP backup.
To control the quiesce options that NetWorker passes to the VC/ESX during VADP backup,
specify the VADP_QUIESCE_SNAPSHOT attribute on the Application Information tab NMC
as follows:
l
If VADP_QUIESCE_SNAPSHOT=Yes, then quiesced snapshots for VM clients are
initiated.
l
If VADP_QUIESCE_SNAPSHOT=No, then non-quiesced snapshots for VM clients are
initiated. In this case, the snapshot will not be application consistent. EMC does not
recommend setting this option.
If this attribute is not specified, then NetWorker initiates quiesced snapshots for VM
clients by default.
Note
The attribute VADP_QUIESCE_SNAPSHOT can be applied either at the VM level or proxy
level. If applied at the VADP proxy level, all the VMs that use this VADP proxy will be
affected.
Advanced use and troubleshooting
VMware VADP backups also support custom pre-and-post processing scripts inside the
Windows VM guest for applications that do not have full VSS support.
The VMware knowledge base article 1006671 provides information on how to configure
custom quiescing scripts inside the VM is:
http://kb.vmware.com/selfservice/microsites/search.do?
cmd=displayKC&docType=kc&docTypeID=DT_KB_1_1&externalId=1006671
The VMware knowledge base article 1031200 provides information on how to instruct
backup processes to skip VSS quiesce for only specific VSS writers:
http://kb.vmware.com/selfservice/microsites/search.do?
cmd=displayKC&docType=kc&docTypeID=DT_KB_1_1&externalId=1031200
The VMware knowledge base article 1018194 provides information on troubleshooting
quiesce issues around VSS on the VM:
http://kb.vmware.com/selfservice/microsites/search.do?
cmd=displayKC&docType=kc&docTypeID=DT_KB_1_1&externalId=1018194
The VMware knowledge base article 1007696 provides troubleshooting of Volume
Shadow Copy (VSS) quiesce related issues inside the VM:
http://kb.vmware.com/selfservice/microsites/search.do?
cmd=displayKC&docType=kc&docTypeID=DT_KB_1_1&externalId=1007696
170
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Selection of physical vs. virtual proxy
NetWorker supports the use of both physical proxy hosts and virtual proxy hosts for
backup of VMware environments. Whether to use a physical or virtual proxy should be
determined based on performance requirements, the choice of backup targets, and
available hardware.
Backup targets for virtual proxy hosts
The following are considerations of backup targets for virtual proxy hosts:
l
If the backup is directed to disk (either AFTD or DDBoost), there are no special
configuration requirements.
l
If the backup is directed to tape drives, then review the requirements and limitations
of using tape drives inside a VM in the section Support for tape drives in a VM on
page 178.
Note
This requires that data transport is set to NBD/NBDSSL mode since VMware does not
allow Hotadd mode in conjunction with VMDirectPath.
Selection of physical vs. virtual proxy
171
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Proxy node sizing and performance considerations
The following proxy node sizing and performance considerations apply when using
physical and virtual proxies:
Note
There are no observed performance differences between physical and virtual proxies
when running on similar hardware.
l
The maximum number of concurrent sessions when using a physical proxy is higher
than that of a virtual proxy. The section Recommendations and considerations for
transport modes on page 179 provides more information on concurrent sessions for
specific transport modes.
l
Recommendations for a physical proxy is 4 CPU cores with 8GB of RAM.
Recommendations for a virtual proxy is 4 vCPUs and 8GB vRAM per proxy, where each
vCPU is equal to or greater than 2.66 GHz.
l
NetWorker supports up to 12 parallel sessions using a single virtual proxy. This refers
to the number of virtual disks processed in parallel, so if a single VM contains
multiple virtual disks, this must be taken into account.
l
Number of virtual proxies per ESX host depends only on the type of hardware on
which the ESX has been installed.
l
For lower-end ESX hosts, it is recommended not to mix I/O load on ESX (with the
virtual proxy and backup VMs residing on a single ESX), but to have a separate ESX
for the virtual proxy.
l
For high-end ESX hosts, it is recommended to have a maximum of 5 virtual proxies
concurrently running on a single ESX host.
l
Optimal CPU load and performance when using DDBoost devices is observed with 4
concurrent backups per device. Lower number of parallel sessions to a single device
does not achieve full performance while higher number increases CPU load without
additional performance gain. Based on the CPU load, there is typically no
performance improvement from adding more than 3 DDBoost devices per proxy node.
VADP snapshot recommendations
The following are recommendations for VADP snapshots:
172
l
Schedule backups when very little I/O activity is expected on the VM datastore, as
this can impact the time required for taking the snapshot or removing the snapshot.
l
It is recommended to keep at least 20% free space on all datastores for snapshot
management.
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Note
When the datastore is almost out of space, VMware creates a snapshot named
Consolidate Helper while attempting to delete snapshots. This snapshot cannot be
automatically deleted by the backup application. To remove the Consolidated Helper
snapshot, the VM must be shut down and the snapshot manually deleted from
vCenter before the next backup. Otherwise, change files may accumulate on the
datastore. The accumulation of such files can affect both the backup performance
and the I/O performance of the VM. Information about deleting the Consolidate
Helper snapshot is provided in the following VMware knowledge base article:
http://kb.vmware.com/kb/1003302
To avoid this issue, ensure that there is always sufficient space available for
snapshots.
l
In the case of VMs that have a large amount of change rate during backups, the
snapshots can grow in size considerably while the backup is running. Therefore,
ensure that the snapshot working directory on the VMFS datastore has enough space
to accommodate the snapshot during the backup.
l
VMs with physical and virtual compatibility RDM disks are not supported for VADP
backups, because VM snapshots cannot be applied to such VMs. During NetWorker
backup of a VM, no RDM related information is backed up, and no RDM disks/data
are restored upon VM recovery. If RDM disks are required, they must be reattached
after the recovery.
Note
If reattaching RDM disks after recovery, make note of all LUNs that are zoned to the
protected VMs.
l
VMware snapshots by default reside on the datastore where the VM configuration
files are located. Therefore, ensure that the snapshot working directory supports the
size of all the disks attached to a given VM.
Starting with version 4.0, ESX and ESXi will compare the maximum size of a snapshot
redolog file with the maximum size of files on the datastore. If the file could grow
beyond the maximum size, ESX cancels the Create Snapshot operation and displays
the following error:
File is larger than the maximum size supported by datastore.
For example, if VM01 has the following disk layout:
n
Disk01 - 50GB stored on VMFS01 datastore with a 1MB Block size
n
Disk02 - 350GB stored on VMFS02 datastore with a 4MB Block size
Attempting to take a snapshot of this VM would fail with the error indicated
above. This is because VMFS01 contains the working directory of the VM01, and
snapshots get stored in the working directory. In the case of Disk02, this may
indicate that the redolog file has grown beyond VMFS01’s maximum file limit of
256GB, which is where it will be stored.
To resolve this issue, either change the location of the VM configuration files, or
change the working directory to a datastore with enough block size.
To move the VM configuration files, use Storage VMotion or Cold migration with
relocation of files. More information is provided in the VMware KB article at the
following link:
VADP snapshot recommendations
173
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
http://kb.vmware.com/selfservice/microsites/search.do?
cmd=displayKC&externalId=1004040
To change the workingDir directory to a datastore with enough block size, refer to
the VMware KB article at the following link:
http://kb.vmware.com/selfservice/microsites/search.do?
cmd=displayKC&externalId=1002929
The following table indicates the maximum virtual disk file size corresponding to
block sizes on a datastore in ESX/ESXi 4.0:
Table 22 Maximum virtual disk file size and corresponding block size for ESX/ESXi 4.0
Block Size Maximum File Size
1 MB
256 GB - 512 Bytes
2 MB
512 GB - 512 Bytes
4 MB
1024 GB - 512 Bytes
8 MB
2048 GB - 512 Bytes
The following table identifies the maximum virtual disk file size corresponding to
block sizes on a datastore in ESX/ESXi 4.1:
Table 23 Maximum virtual disk size and corresponding block size for ESX/ESXi 4.1
Block Size Maximum File Size
1 MB
256 GB
2 MB
512 GB
4 MB
1024 GB
8 MB
2048 GB - 512 Bytes
Manually quiescing VADP snapshots
Issues on the VM may prevent the successful completion of quiescing VSS prior to
snapshot creation. The following VMware knowledgebase article provides details on
troubleshooting quiesce issues around VSS on the VM:
http://kb.vmware.com/selfservice/documentLink.do?
externalID=1018194&micrositeID=null
As a workaround, non-quiesced snapshots can be configured. This configuration will
apply to all snapshots and will require a reboot of the VM. VMware recommends
scheduling downtime before performing this action:
Procedure
1. Uninstall VMware Tools from the VM.
2. Reboot the system.
3. Reinstall VMware Tools. Ensure to select Custom Install.
4. Deselect VSS.
174
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Recommendations for Data Domain systems
The following are recommendations for deploying NetWorker and Data Domain systems
to back up the virtualized environment.
l
When using DD VTLs, SAN transport mode is required; as a result, the proxy host
cannot be a VM.
l
For DD Boost enabled VADP backups:
n
The best CPU load and performance is observed with 4 concurrent backups per
device. However, a NetWorker 8.x DD Boost library supports a greater number of
concurrent backups (target sessions).
n
Setting a lower number of parallel sessions to a single device does not result in
optimal performance.
n
Setting a higher number of parallel sessions to a single device increases the CPU
load without any improvements to performance.
n
It is recommended to have at least 400MB to 500MB of RAM for each VM being
backed up if small to medium sized VMs are in use (VMs with less than 100GB
virtual disks attached). If the largest VM being backed up has more than 100GB of
virtual disks attached, the RAM can be further increased.
More information on calculating the optimal memory for a given proxy is provided
in the section Memory requirements for the VADP proxy on page 176.
l
Better throughput is observed with DD Boost when there is less commonality
between the VMs being backed up. As a best practice, it is recommended that VMs
related to the same parent VM template/clone should be part of different backup
groups, and these backup groups should have different start times.
l
In the case of both Hotadd and SAN modes, a 20-40% improvement is observed in
the backup throughput for every additional proxy, provided the backend storage
where the VMs reside is not a bottleneck.
l
If using Hotadd mode:
n
Refer to the section Recommendations and considerations for transport modes on
page 179 for memory requirements. These requirements may increase depending
on the size of the VM virtual disks, as described in the RAM recommendation
above and the section Memory requirements for the VADP proxy on page 176.
n
Virtual proxy parallelism should not be set to a value greater than 12. This limit
can further be decreased if the VMs have more than one disk attached. More
information related to best practices when using Hotadd mode is provided in the
section Recommendations and considerations for transport modes on page 179.
n
In the case of multiple virtual proxies, it is recommended to consolidate all virtual
proxies under dedicated ESX/ESXi host(s) in the environment to minimize the
impact on production VMs during the backup window. These ESX/ESXi hosts
should not be running any other VMs.
n
A maximum of 5 virtual proxies per one standalone ESX is recommended.
n
A maximum of 3 virtual proxies per ESX is recommended in a DRS cluster for
proxies.
Network and Firewall port requirements
Be aware of the following firewall and network requirements:
l
If there is a firewall between the VADP proxy host and the servers that run VMs that
you plan to back up from the VADP proxy host, ensure that bi-directional TCP/IP
Recommendations for Data Domain systems
175
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
connections can be established on port 902 between the VADP proxy host and the
servers.
l
If the Virtual Center or vCenter server uses a port other than the default port of 443,
specify the port in the endpoint attribute of NSRhypervisor field. Configuring a VADP
proxy host and Hypervisor resource manually by using nsradmin on page 144
provides more information.
l
VADP does not support IPv6. If vCenter is installed in a Windows 2008 system with
IPv6 enabled (IPv6 is enabled by default) and the same system is also used as the
VADP proxy, VADP backups will hang.
Ensure that IPv6 is disabled on the following:
n
vCenter
n
ESX/ESXi
n
VADP-Proxy
Note
ESX/ESXi refers to the actual host system and not the VMs to be backed up.
Disable IPv6 using Network Connections in the Control Panel, then add an IPv4
entry like the following to the hosts file on the system where vCenter is installed:
<IPv4 address> <vCenter FQDN> <vCenter hostname>
After this entry has been added, run the following command in the VADP proxy
host to verify that the IPv4 address is being resolved:
C:\Users\Administrator>ping <vCenter hostname>
Memory requirements for the VADP proxy
The following NetWorker processes are related to VADP backup operations:
l
nsrvadp_save
l
nsrvddk
l
save
The first two of these processes get spawned for each VM backed up. A save process gets
spawned for each VM being backed up only if the backup is FLR-enabled.
Note
Once the backup of the VM completes, all the above processes exit, releasing the
memory consumed on the proxy host.
Memory sizing requirements for the VADP proxy are as follows:
176
l
For Linux VMs or FLR-disabled Windows backups, approximately 200MB per VM is
required.
l
For FLR-enabled Windows backups, use the following information to calculate the
memory required:
n
When VADP backups are running, nsrvadp_save > , which runs on the VADP proxy
machine, consumes up to 2MB for every 1GB of virtual disk being backed up.
n
The nsrvddk and save processes consume approximately 200MB memory per VM
As an example, if you are running backups for a maximum of 4 VMs concurrently,
then take the 4 Windows VMs with the largest disk sizes in the environment; in
this example, if each VM has the following disk layout:
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
n
VM1: Windows= Disk1-50GB, Disk2-100GB, Disk3-512GB
n
VM2: Windows=Disk1-50GB, Disk2-512GB, Disk3-1TB
n
VM3: Windows=Disk1-50GB, Disk2-100GB, Disk3-256GB
n
VM4: Windows=Disk1-100GB, Disk2-1.5TB
The memory consumed by VADP processes on the proxy would then be:
n
VM1: (Maximum sized disk in GB for VM* 2 MB) + 200 MB**= 1224 MB
n
VM2: (Maximum sized disk in GB for VM* 2 MB) + 200 MB** = 2248 MB
n
VM3: (Maximum sized disk in GB for VM* 2 MB) + 200 MB** = 712 MB
n
VM4: (Maximum sized disk in GB for VM* 2 MB) + 200 MB** = 3272 MB
Therefore, the total memory needed on the proxy for VADP processes would be
7456 MB.
Note
**200 MB is the memory needed per Windows VM for the nsrvddk and save
processes.
l
If the proxy is also being used as storage node, the following nsrmmd overhead
needs to be included in the total memory requirement:
n
DD BOOST per device memory usage- approximately 500MB
n
backup to disk per device memory usage- approximately 50MB
VADP mount point recommendations and space considerations
Note the following recommendations for the VADP mount point (VADP_BACKUPROOT):
l
Ensure the mount point is not located in the system folder (for example, c:/Windows/
temp) as this folder is skipped during backup. Having the mount point in this folder
may result in backup failures or backups that skip data due to directives that are
applied during VADP backups.
l
Do not use any special characters (for example, *, # and so on) in the VM name or the
name of the datastore associated with the VM. If these names contain special
characters, the mount operation fails.
l
The VADP mount point cache requires temporary space equal to at least 5-10% of the
total amount of data being backed up in the case of Windows VMs. This space is
required for storing the VMDK index during the backup, and is only used during the
parsing of metadata while the backup is in progress. The space required for this task
clears once the backup completes. In the case of Linux or FLR-disabled Windows
VMs, minimal space is required as indicated in the note below.
For a VM with a large number of files, using a faster disk to cache files will help during
parsing
As an example of how much space is required for a Windows VM:
If the proxy client parallelism is set to 5 so that a maximum of 5 Windows VMs are backed
up concurrently, then calculate the total used disk space for the 5 largest Windows VMs
in the environment. Allocate at least 10% of this total used space for the
VADP_BACKUPROOT mount point.
So, if each VM in the above example has around 2 disks and each disk has 40GB used
space.
l
Total amount of data being backed up=40GB*2*5=400GB
l
Total amount needed for mount point=400*10%=40GB
VADP mount point recommendations and space considerations
177
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
In this case, ensure that the drive specified for VADP_BACKUPROOT has at least 40GB
of free space.
Note
This mount point space is only needed when performing FLR-enabled image level
backups of Windows VMs. It is otherwise very minimal (in the order of a few MB per
VM) when performing image level backups of Linux VMs or FLR-disabled image level
backups of Windows VMs.
Support for tape drives in a VM
In order to use tape drives (physical and virtual tape drives) in a VM, specific compatible
hardware and VMware ESX/ESXi versions are required, and the drives must be configured
using VMDirectPath.
VMDirectPath allows device drivers in guest operating systems to directly access and
control physical PCI and PCIe devices connected to the ESX host in a hardware passthrough mode, bypassing the virtualization layer.
The VMDirectPath feature is available in VMware ESX/ESXi 4.0 Update 2 or later versions
of Hypervisor. The following section assumes that the reader has a working knowledge of
VMware vSphere ESX/ESXi and VM configuration.
VMDirectPath requirements and recommendations
The following requirements and recommendations apply when using VMDirectPath:
l
VMDirectPath requires Intel Virtualization Technology for Directed I/O (VT-d) or AMD
IP Virtualization Technology (IOMMU). You may need to enable this option in the BIOS
of the ESX/ESXi system.
l
The ESX/ESXi version should be 4.0 Update 2 or later version.
l
The VM should be Hardware version 7. For example, vmx-07.
l
The optimal VMDirectPath PCI/PCIe devices per ESX/ESXi host is 8.
l
The optimal VMDirectPath PCI/PCIe devices per VM is 4.
VMDirectPath restrictions
The following restrictions apply during the configuration of VMDirectPath.
l
The ESX host must be rebooted after VMDirectPath is enabled.
l
The VM must be powered down when VMDirectPath is enabled in order to add the
PCI/PCIe device directly to the VM.
l
Using fiber channel tape drives in a VM is not supported without VMDirectPath in
production environments due to the lack of SCSI isolation. Tape drives can be
configured and used without VMDirectPath, but the support is limited to nonproduction environments.
The VMware knowledge base article http://kb.vmware.com/kb/1010789 provides
information on configuring VMDirectPath.
The following features are not available for a VM configured with VMDirectPath, as the
VMkernel is configured without the respective device under its control when passed to a
VM:
178
l
vMotion
l
Storage vMotion
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
l
Fault Tolerance
l
Device hot add (CPU and memory)
l
Suspend and resume
l
VADP Hotadd transport mode (when used as virtual proxy)
Note
If using VMDirectPath in a NetWorker VADP virtual proxy host, then the transport
modes are limited to either NBD or NBDSSL. This is due to a VMware limitation.
The following technical note provides additional information on VMDirectPath:
http://www.vmware.com/pdf/vsp_4_vmdirectpath_host.pdf
Considerations for VMDirectPath with NetWorker
The following are considerations apply when using VMDirectPath with NetWorker:
l
For virtual environments that must run backups to fiber channel connected tape
devices where there is a large amount of data in the VM, VMDirectPath can be used
with NetWorker.
l
1 vCPU is sufficient to process 500 GB of data as long as the other VMs are not
sharing the physical core on the underlying ESX/ESXi hardware, and the vCPU has
exclusive access to the single core.
l
If other VMs that reside on the same ESX/ESXi are sharing the underlying hardware
(physical CPU), it may be required to add more vCPU and dedicating underlying
hardware by using CPU affinity settings.
l
To achieve optimal performance, it is recommended that the guest VM acting as the
DSN has a minimum of 4 GB of memory available with 2 vCPUs allocated.
l
If multiple target sessions are needed in each device and 4 or more vCPUs are
assigned to the VM, ensure that there are enough devices available for backup
operations. An insufficient amount of devices can result in less throughput due to
CPU scheduling overhead of the Hypervisor.
l
Ensure that the device drivers for the HBA are updated on the guest operating system.
Recommendations and considerations for transport modes
Following are recommendations for SAN, Hotadd and NBD/NBDSSL transport modes.
SAN transport mode considerations
The following recommendations and considerations apply when one of the VADP
transport modes is set to SAN (VADP_TRANSPORT_MODE=SAN):
l
Prior to connecting the VADP proxy host to the SAN fabric, perform the steps in the
section Diskpart utility for SAN and Hotadd transport modes on page 184.
l
Memory usage per DD BOOST device should be approximately 500MB.
l
A maximum of 50 concurrent backups should be performed per proxy when using a
backup-to-disk device.
l
A maximum of 100 concurrent backups should be performed per proxy when using a
DDBoost device.
l
A maximum of 100 concurrent backups can be run at any given time against a given
VC.
Recommendations and considerations for transport modes
179
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Hotadd transport mode considerations
The following recommendations and considerations apply when one of the VADP
transport modes is set to Hotadd (VADP_TRANSPORT_MODE=Hotadd):
l
Prior to running VADP backups using the virtual proxy host, perform the steps in the
section Diskpart utility for SAN and Hotadd transport modes on page 184.
l
A minimum of 4 vCPUs must be allocated per virtual proxy, with 8GB vRAM per proxy
and each vCPU equal to or greater than 2.66 GHz.
l
Memory usage per DD BOOST device should be approximately 300MB.
l
The ESX server must be running ESX 3.5 update 4 or later.
l
Client parallelism on the VADP virtual proxy should not be set to a value greater than
12 where the VMs being backed up have a maximum of 1 disk per VM in the
environment.
If the VMs in the environment have more than 1 disk per VM but less than 12 disks
per VM, then the maximum client parallelism value on the VADP virtual proxy should
not exceed N, where N is based on the following calculation:
Maximum of N number of disks can be backed up by the virtual proxy provided this is
equal to the number of free scsi controller slots in the first SCSI controller (for
example, SCSI controller #0), and that N does not exceed 12.
For example, if a maximum of 6 VMs backups are to be run concurrently, then take
the 6 VMs with the largest number of attached virtual disks in the environment and
calculate the total number of disks:
n
If the 6 VMs have a total of 12 virtual disks (i.e. 2 disks per VM), set the
parallelism on the virtual proxy client to a maximum of 6 (which will in turn
perform a concurrent backup of a maximum of 12 disks being attached to the
virtual proxy).
n
If the 6 VMs have a total of 18 virtual disks (i.e. 3 disks per VM), set the
parallelism on the virtual proxy client to a maximum of 4 (which will in turn
perform a concurrent backup of a maximum of 12 disks being attached to the
virtual proxy).
Note
If the VMs in the environment have more than 12 disks attached per VM, then use
NBD or NBDSSL mode instead of Hotadd mode.
180
l
The virtual proxy can only back up those VMs whose virtual disk size does not exceed
the maximum size supported by the VMFS datastore where the configuration files of
the virtual proxy reside.
As a best practice, always place the configuration files of the virtual proxy on a
datastore that has a block size of 8MB. This will ensure that the virtual proxy can
back up all of the supported virtual disk sizes.
l
The datastore for the VADP proxy VM must have sufficient free space before the
Hotadd backup begins.
l
If there are multiple virtual proxies, it is recommended to host all the virtual proxies
in a dedicated ESX/ESXi server. This would keep the virtual proxy resource
consumption of CPU and memory isolated within that ESX/ESXi environment without
impacting the production VMs.
l
VMs having IDE virtual disks are not supported for Hotadd mode. Instead, nbd mode
is recommended for these.
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
l
The VM to back up and the VM that contains the Hotadd VADP proxy host must reside
in the same VMware datacenter. This requirement also applies to VM restore — the
VM to restore and the VM where the restore is initiated must reside in the same
VMware datacenter.
l
If a backup failure occurs, the virtual proxy may sometimes fail to unmount Hotadd
disks. In such cases, you must manually unmount the Hotadd disks from the virtual
proxy. If any of the client VM disks are still attached to the virtual proxy, perform the
following:
1. Right-click the virtual proxy and go to Edit Settings.
2. Select each of the Hotadd disks and choose Remove.
Note
Ensure that you select Remove from virtual machine and not Remove and delete…
when unmounting.
NBD/NBDSSL transport mode considerations
The following recommendations and considerations apply when one of the VADP
transport modes is set to NBD or NBDSSL (i.e., VADP_TRANSPORT_MODE=NBD):
l
If NBDSSL mode fails for recovery of VMs, apply the workaround in the section
Recovering a VM using NBDSSL, SAN, or Hotadd transport mode on page 167.
l
One can only run a concurrent backup of 20 virtual disks against a given ESX/ESXi.
The limit refers to the maximum number of virtual disks and is per ESX/ESXi host,
irrespective of the number of proxies being used in the environment.
Due to this limitation, it is recommended to apply the following best practices:
n
If the ESX is not part of a VMware cluster or is part of a DRS-disabled VMware
cluster, then apply one of the following:
– When using a single proxy to backup a given ESX via NBD/NBDSSL, set the
client parallelism of the VADP proxy Client resource such that the limit of 20
concurrent disk connections per ESX host is not exceeded.
– When using multiple proxies to backup a given ESX via NBD/NBDSSL, then the
client parallelism on each VADP proxy should be calibrated such that the total
concurrent disk connections per ESX host does not exceed 20.
n
If ESX is part of a DRS-enabled VMware cluster, then apply one of the following
best practices:
– When using a single proxy to backup via NBD/NBDSSL, set the client
parallelism of the VADP proxy Client resource such that the limit of 20
concurrent disk connections per cluster is not exceeded.
– When using multiple proxies to backup via NBD/NBDSSL, then the client
parallelism on each VADP proxy should be calibrated such that the total
concurrent disk connections per cluster does not exceed 20.
Note
In the following examples, the backup group parallelism would take effect only
if the VADP proxy host client parallelism is set to an equal or higher number.
One proxy in the environment, all VMs on the same ESX (no cluster)
In the following example, there is a single proxy in the environment and 11 VMs need to
be backed up via NBD/NBDSSL. All 11 VMs are hosted on the same ESX, which is not part
of a cluster, and both of these jobs have to be run at the same time:
Recommendations and considerations for transport modes
181
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
l
8 VMs from ESX contains 2 disks disk.
l
3 VMs from same ESX contains 3 disks each.
Use one of the following best practices:
l
Set the client parallelism of the proxy to 8.
l
Create a single backup group containing all 11 VMs from the given ESX and set the
group parallelism to 8.
Either of the above would ensure that at any given time, the maximum number of disks
being backed up from that ESX will not exceed 20.
Two proxies in the environment, all VMs on the same ESX on DRS-disabled cluster
In the following example, there are two proxies in the environment to back up 11 VMs via
NBD/NBDSSL. All 11 VMs are hosted on the same ESX, which is part of a DRS-disabled
cluster, and both of these jobs have to be run at the same time:
l
Proxy1 has been assigned to backup 8 VMs, each VM contains 2 disks.
l
Proxy2 has been assigned to backup 3 VMs, each VM contains 3 disks.
Use one of the following best practices:
l
Set the client parallelism of Proxy1 and Proxy2 to 5 and 2 respectively.
l
Create a single backup group containing all 11 VMs from the given ESX and set the
group parallelism to 8.
Either of the above would ensure that at any given time, the maximum number of disks
being backed up from that ESX will not exceed 20.
Two proxies in the environment, all VMs hosted on DRS-enabled cluster
In the following example, there are two proxies in the environment to back up 11 VMs via
NBD/NBDSSL. All 11 VMs are hosted on one DRS-enabled cluster:
l
Proxy1 has been assigned to backup 8 VMs, each VM contains 2 disks.
l
Proxy2 has been assigned to backup 3 VMs, each VM contains 3 disks.
Both these jobs have to be run at the same time.
Use one of the following best practices:
l
Set the client parallelism of Proxy1 and Proxy2 to 5 and 2 respectively.
l
Create a single backup group containing all 11 VMs from the given cluster and set the
group parallelism to 8.
Either of the above would ensure that at any given time, the maximum number of disks
being backed up from that cluster will not exceed 20.
Performance optimization recommendations
The following section provides recommendations for optimizing VADP performance.
l
182
The success of the VADP snapshot creation and deletion is based on two things:
n
The amount of I/O occurring on the VM datastore during snapshot creation.
n
The design of the I/O substructure associated with each datastore.
l
To avoid snapshot-associated issues, backups should be scheduled during times of
relatively low I/O activity on the VM. Reducing the number of simultaneous backups
can also help with this.
l
The use of multiple backup proxy servers is supported with NetWorker. Depending on
the number of VMs/ESX servers in use, another backup proxy can be added to
increase backup throughput capacity.
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
l
During VADP backups, the backup proxy server performs a significant amount of
backup processing. Proper sizing of the backup proxy server can help ensure
maximum backup performance of the VM environment. In some instances, a physical
proxy may be preferable.
The capacity of the backup proxy can be broken down into two main areas:
1. VADP data path — This is the path that the backup data created by VADP will
follow during the backup lifecycle. The VADP proxy server accesses backup data
using the configured network transport mode. The configured transport mode can
be set to the following values:
n
SAN (Storage Area Network)
n
Hotadd
n
NBD (Network Block Device)
n
NBDSSL (Network Block Device with SSL)
2. NetWorker data path — The VADP proxy can also be a NetWorker server, client or
storage node. To maximize backup throughput, the VADP proxy should be
configured as a storage node so that client data is written directly to the backup
media.
The overall backup performance of VADP Proxy will be defined by the slowest component
in the entire backup data path. These components are:
l
VADP transport mode used
l
VADP Proxy system resources such as the CPU, internal bus, and RAM
l
VADP snapshot creation time
l
I/O load at the time of creation
VADP proxy access to LUNs
The following considerations apply when using the following transport modes to access
LUNs.
SAN transport mode
For SAN mode backups, the VADP proxy requires read access to the SAN LUNs hosting the
VMs.
For image recovery via SAN mode, ensure that the VADP proxy has read-write access to
the SAN LUNs hosting the VMs. To ensure read-write access, add the VADP proxy to the
same fabric zones to which the ESX server system belongs.
Hotadd transport mode
For Hotadd mode, the ESX server (where the VADP proxy VM resides) must have access to
the datastores of the VMs that you want to back up. For example, if the datastores are
from SAN LUNs and the ESX server where the VADP proxy resides is separate from the ESX
server where the VMs are located, then the ESX hosting the proxy should be part of the
same fabric zones to which the ESX hosting the VMs belongs.
NBD/NBDSSL transport modes
For nbd/nbdssl, no zoning is required since access to the datastore is always by way of
LAN. Only network connectivity to ESX/ESXi is required for access to the datastore.
VADP proxy access to LUNs
183
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Diskpart utility for SAN and Hotadd transport modes
When an RDM NTFS volume is being used for any of the VMs on the VADP proxy host,
Windows will automatically attempt to mount the volume and assign drive letters to VM
disks during backup. This may lead to data corruption on the VMs.
To prevent Windows from automatically assigning drive letters to the RDM NTFS, perform
the following steps.
Note
Steps 1 and 2 are only applicable in the case of SAN transport mode where SAN fabric
zoning is already in place such that the VADP proxy host is already displaying the SAN
LUNs in Windows disk management. If this does not apply, skip to Step 3.
1. Shut down the Windows proxy.
2. Disconnect the Windows proxy from the SAN or mask all the LUNs containing VMFS
volumes or RDM for VMs.
3. Start the proxy and log into an account with administrator privileges.
4. Open a command prompt and run the diskpart utility by entering the following:
diskpart
The diskpart utility starts and prints its own command prompt.
5. Disable automatic drive letter assignment to newly discovered volumes by entering
the following in the diskpart command prompt:
automount disable
6. Clean out entries of previously mounted volumes in the registry by entering the
following in the diskpart command prompt:
automount scrub
Upgrading from VCB to VADP (pre-NetWorker 8.1)
This section applies to upgrades from a NetWorker 7.6 SP1 or earlier release that uses
the VMware Consolidated Backup (VCB) solution to protect virtual NetWorker clients, to a
NetWorker 7.6 SP2 or later release that provides backup and recovery of VMware virtual
clients using vStorage APIs for Data Protection (VADP), up to NetWorker release 8.1.
NetWorker 7.6 SP2 and later releases up to NetWorker 8.1 still support VCB-based
backups with NetWorker 7.6 SP1 proxy servers. However, VADP-based backups must use
a NetWorker 7.6 SP2 or later proxy server. A NetWorker 7.6 SP2 or later proxy cannot be
used for VCB backups.
When upgrading the NetWorker software from any release previous to NetWorker 7.6 SP2,
if VCB was used for backups in the previous release (for example, NetWorker 7.6 SP1)
then the upgrade tool must be run on the NetWorker server to transition to VADP
backups. The following chapter provides information on upgrading the NetWorker
software to release 7.6 Service Pack 2 or later to use VADP.
Upgrading an existing NetWorker server and VCB proxy
After installing the NetWorker Release 7.6 SP2 or later software on the NetWorker server
and the VADP proxy server, run the nsrvadpserv_tool command on the NetWorker server.
The nsrvadpserv_tool command updates pre-7.6 Service Pack 2 NetWorker virtual clients
184
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
to use VADP for backup and recovery, converting all clients on a specified proxy. The
nsrvadpserv_tool replaces the nsrvcbserv_tool that was used in NetWorker 7.6 SP1.
Be aware of the following when running this command:
l
If you are upgrading from a pre-7.6 NetWorker installation, the Proxy Host client must
be configured with Administrator privileges for the operating system. To ensure the
Proxy Host is configured with Administrator rights:
1. Connect to the NetWorker server by using NMC.
2. Click Configuration.
3. On the left pane, click Clients.
4. Right mouse click on the Proxy client and select Properties.
5. Click on the Apps & Modules tab.
6. In the Remote User and Password fields, specify a user name and password for an
account with Administrator rights on the Proxy server.
l
By default, the nsrvadpserv_tool is located C:\program files\legato\nsr\bin.
l
The NetWorker server and VCB Proxy host must be at NetWorker Release 7.6 Service
Pack 2 and later.
l
If the VCB_LOOKUP_METHOD is set to name, refer to the notes below.
Special consideration needs to be given if the VCB_LOOKUP_METHOD defined is set
to IP rather than name.
To determine the Lookup Method on the Proxy Client resource, in the Application
Information section, make note of the value for VCB_LOOKUP_METHOD. If the value is
not set to name, manual steps detailed later in this procedure will need to be
performed after the nsrvadpserv_tool is executed.
To update pre-7.6 Service Pack 2 NetWorker VMware virtual clients, type this command
on the NetWorker server:
nsrvadpserv_tool –p VM_proxy_hostname_or_IP_address
The nsrvadpserv_tool does the following:
l
l
For pre-7.6 clients:
n
Identifies the NetWorker clients that are VMs configured for the specified VADP
proxy server.
n
Executes the nsrvadpclnt_tool on the NetWorker client configured as the VADP
proxy server.
n
Reads the configuration file (config.js) and sends the information to the
NetWorker server.
n
Updates the Application Information attribute of the NetWorker Client resource
acting as the VADP proxy server with information from the config.js file.
n
Sets the backup command attribute in the NetWorker Client resource of all VMs
configured for the specified VADP proxy server to nsrvadp_save.
n
Creates the vCenter resource.
For 7.6 and 7.6 Service Pack 1 clients:
n
Changes the backup command attribute in the NetWorker Client resource of all
VMs from nsrvcb_save to nsrvadp_save.
n
Updates the Application Information (APPINFO) attribute of the virtual Client
resources so that “VCB” is replaced with “VADP” in all APPINFO variables.
Examples are shown in the following table.
Upgrading an existing NetWorker server and VCB proxy
185
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Note
After upgrading the NetWorker server from 7.6 SP1 to 7.6 SP2 or later, the VM Client
resource associated with the VCB proxy does not display the correct information in NMC.
For example, if you are using both VADP and VCB proxies, VM Client resources that are
still associated with VCB proxies will display the VADP proxy when viewing the VM
resource in NMC. The correct information displays in the nsradmin output for the Client
resource.
This issue is documented in the Release Notes under NW129735.
Table 24 APPINFO variable replacements
Old APPINFO variable name
New APPINFO variable name
VCB_MAX_BACKOFF_TIME=20
VADP_MAX_BACKOFF_TIME=20
VCB_TRANSPORT_MODE=nbd
VADP_TRANSPORT_MODE=nbd
VCB_HOST=10.31.78.120
VADP_HOST=10.31.78.120
VCB_BACKUPROOT=F:\mnt
VADP_BACKUPROOT=F:\mnt
VCB_MAX_RETRIES=10
VADP_MAX_RETRIES=10
VCB_LOOKUP_METHOD=name
removed
The VADP_MAX_BACKOFF_TIME and VADP_MAX_RETRIES variables are removed if their
values were set to 10 and 0 respectively, which are their default values.
The VADP_HYPERVISOR=VC_name variable is added to the APPINFO list of variables. This
variable value is based on the VADP_HOST variable that is specified in the VADP proxy
server’s Client resource.
If VM lookups are done by name instead of IP address, you must add the
VADP_VM_NAME variable in the Application Information attribute of each NetWorker
virtual Client resource. The variable format is entered as VADP_VM_NAME=vm1 where
vm1 is the display name of the VM used in the vCenter.
VADP_VM_NAME is case-sensitive. For example, if the VM host name is upper-case (such
as SUSE11-X86), the value of VADP_VM_NAME must be set to SUSE11-X86. Also, if the
name entered for VADP_VM_NAME contains spaces, the name must be contained within
quotation marks (for example, VADP_VM_NAME="this is my vm name").
Change vCenter role privileges after upgrading
The following steps are required if VCB backup/recovery was previously performed
through NetWorker using a non-Administrator vCenter role.
In order to perform backups using VADP, the permissions associated with the nonAdministrator role need to be modified in vCenter.
Creating a VADP User role
Procedure
1. Log in to the vCenter server with Administrator privileges using vSphere Client.
2. From the vCenter server, select View > Administration > Roles.
3. Right-click the existing non-Administrator role that was previously used by NetWorker
and select Clone. A new cloned role is created.
186
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
4. Rename the cloned role to VADP User.
5. Right-click the VADP User role and select Edit Role.
6. Assign the required permissions to the VADP User role. The section Minimum vCenter
permissions needed to back up and recover using VADP on page 154 provides more
information.
Assigning the VADP User role to the user specified in the NetWorker Hypervisor resource
Note
The VMware Basic System Administration documentation and the Datacenter
Administration Guide provide more information on assigning a role to a user. The VMware
documentation is available at http://www.vmware.com/support/pubs/.
Procedure
1. Log in to the vCenter Server with Administrator privileges using vSphere Client.
2. In the left pane, select the vCenter server.
3. In the right pane, click the Permissions tab.
4. Right-click anywhere in the right pane and select Add Permission from the drop-down.
5. Add the NetWorker Hypervisor user and assign the VADP User role.
6. Ensure that Propagate to Child Objects is enabled, then click OK.
Upgrading only the proxy client to NetWorker 7.6 SP2 or later
If you only want to upgrade the NetWorker proxy client to 7.6 SP2 or later and do not want
to upgrade the NetWorker server, a manual upgrade can be performed by using the
following steps.
Note
The NetWorker server must be at a minimum of version 7.6. If the NetWorker server is not
version 7.6 or 7.6 SP1, it will need to be upgraded prior to performing the proxy client
upgrade.
A NetWorker 7.6 SP2 or later proxy can only be used for VADP based backups and should
be used with a NetWorker 7.6 SP2 or later server.
Make the following changes to the APPINFO attribute of the Client resource for the proxy:
Procedure
1. Change VCB_BACKUPROOT to VADP_BACKUP_ROOT.
2. Change VCB_HOST to VADP_HOST.
3. Change VCB_TRANSPORT_MODE to VADP_TRANSPORT_MODE.
4. If VCB_VM_LOOKUP_METHOD is set to ipdddr, remove that entry; if it is set to name,
the Client resource of the virtual client must be changed, as indicated in step 9.
5. Remove VCB_PREEXISTING_MOUNTPOINT and VCB_PREEXISTING_VCB_SNAPSHOT.
6. Change VCB_MAX_RETRIES to VADP_MAX_RETRIES.
7. Change VCB_BACKOFF_TIME to VADP_BACKOFF_TIME.
8. In the Client resource for the virtual client associated with the proxy, change the
Backup command from nsrvcb_save to nsrvadp_save.
Upgrading only the proxy client to NetWorker 7.6 SP2 or later
187
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
9. If VCB_VM_LOOKUP_METHOD was set to name in the proxy Client resource, add
VADP_VM_NAME to the virtual Client resource’s APPINFO attribute with the value of
the VM Name that is known to the Virtual Center.
Note
The NMC Configuration wizards for NetWorker 7.6 SP2 or later will not work with a
pre-7.6 SP2 server. Information must be entered manually in the Client resource, even
for new proxy clients, until the server is upgraded to NetWorker 7.6 SP2 or later.
Upgrade to use vCenter if ESX/ESXi server was previously used for VM backups
The following upgrade steps must be performed if VM backups were previously
configured directly to the ESX/ESXi server instead of going through the vCenter server.
Using a manual upgrade
If the nsrvadpserv_tool cannot be run (for example, if using a 7.6.1 or 7.6.0 NetWorker
server instead of upgrading the server to 7.6 SP2), perform the following steps:
Procedure
1. Follow the manual upgrade steps provided in the section Upgrading only the proxy
client to NetWorker 7.6 SP2 or later on page 187.
2. Manually create a new Hypervisor resource for vCenter.
3. Update the proxy host with the appropriate VADP_HOST values.
Using the nsrvadpserv_tool
If the NetWorker server is being upgraded to 7.6 SP2 or later, perform the following steps:
Procedure
1. Run the upgrade tool as outlined in the section Upgrading an existing NetWorker
server and VCB proxy on page 184.
2. Manually create a new Hypervisor resource for vCenter.
3. Update the proxy host with the appropriate VADP_HOST values.
Space requirement changes on proxy for VADP vs VCB
In NetWorker releases using VCB, extra space was required for the mount point on the
VCB proxy for copy operations during backup and recovery. NetWorker releases using the
VADP proxy require significantly less space (typically, around 10% of the VM data size).
Post-upgrading steps for Virtual Center on a 64-bit Windows host
The procedure described in this section is optional and applies only if your pre-7.6
Service Pack 2 VMware integration with NetWorker had a Virtual Center server installed
on a 64-bit Windows host.
Prior to NetWorker 7.6 Service Pack 2, if the Virtual Center server was installed on a 64-bit
Windows host, you had to create a “command host” on a 32-bit Windows host and then
reference the command host in the Hypervisor resource that was set up for Virtual Center.
In NetWorker 7.6 Service Pack 2 and later, these additional steps are not required.
To eliminate the need for a 32-bit command host when the Virtual Center is installed on a
64-bit host:
188
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
Procedure
1. Install the NetWorker 7.6 Service Pack 2 or later client software on the 64-bit Virtual
Center host.
2. Modify the Command Host attribute in the Hypervisor resource to specify the 64-bit
Virtual Center server name.
a. From the Administration window, click Configuration.
b. In the expanded left pane, right-click Virtualization and then select Enable AutoDiscovery.
c. In the Auto-Discovery dialog box, click Advanced.
d. Delete the name of the 32-bit Windows computer that was in the Command Host
field. When this field is empty, the name of the Virtual Center server is used as the
Command Host.
e. Ensure that the value in the Command Name field is nsrvim, then click OK.
Post-upgrading steps for Virtual Center on a 64-bit Windows host
189
VADP Backup and Recovery (legacy)
190
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
CHAPTER 4
Licensing
This chapter contains the following topics:
l
l
l
l
l
Virtual environments simplified licensing............................................................192
Physical ESX hosts in non-VADP configurations................................................... 192
Guest-based licensing.........................................................................................192
NetWorker VMware Protection licensing.............................................................. 193
VADP licensing.................................................................................................... 193
Licensing
191
Licensing
Virtual environments simplified licensing
NetWorker uses a simplified licensing model for virtualized environments. The EMC
Software Compatibility Guide contains a list of supported server virtualization
environments.
Two new attributes have been added to the General tab of the Client resource to identify
the client as a virtual client:
l
Virtual client. Set the attribute to Yes by selecting the Virtual Client attribute
checkbox if the client is a virtual client.
l
Physical host. If the client is a virtual client, set the attribute to the hostname of the
primary/initial physical machine that is hosting the virtual client.
The NetWorker Licensing Guide provides more information on virtual licensing.
Physical ESX hosts in non-VADP configurations
The client license used for physical ESX hosts in non-VADP configurations is the Virtual
Edition Client license. This license enables backup from any resident guest VM that has
the NetWorker client software installed.
Guest-based licensing
For guest based backups (not using VCB/VADP) with the NetWorker client installed on
each physical host running a virtualization technology (Virtual Machine), only one Virtual
Edition Client license is required per physical host. The Virtual Edition Client license
backs up an unlimited number of VMs or guest host operating systems.
Guest based backups that use this license include:
l
VMWare ESX servers
l
Solaris zones
l
LDOMs
l
LPARs
l
nPARs
l
VPARs
l
Microsoft Hyper-V
l
Xen and others
The following licensing model is used:
192
l
One NetWorker Module license per application type, per physical host for non-VCB/
VADP based backups.
l
One client connection license per physical host for non-VADP based backups.
l
When using VMotion, each ESX server that hosts the source Virtual Machine or
destination Virtual Machine will require the virtual edition client license and the
appropriate application module license.
l
For ESX Servers using VMware Distributed Resource Scheduler (DRS) and VMware HA,
a NetWorker Virtual Edition Client is required for each ESX Server in the ESX Cluster
Farm. The appropriate number of module licenses depending upon the applications
running in the farm.
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
Licensing
For example, an environment has 60 VMs on 5 ESX Servers. Of the 60 VMs, 6 host SQL
Server, 1 hosts Exchange and 1 hosts SharePoint. DRS and VMotion are used and the
entire farm needs to be protected. The following licenses are needed:
l
Qty 5 of NetWorker Virtual Edition Clients (1 for each ESX Server in the farm)
l
Qty 7 of NMM licenses
l
n
For SQL, it would be Min (6, 5) = 5
n
For SharePoint, it would be Min (1, 5) = 1
n
For Exchange, it would be Min (1, 5) = 1
For application backups, a NetWorker Virtual Edition Client and the appropriate
NetWorker Application module is required for each physical server. One license is
required for each application type (SQL, Exchange, SharePoint, Oracle, and SAP) used
within all of the VMs on a single physical server. There are no changes to model
codes for NetWorker Modules, so use the existing codes and license enablers.
For application protection, one NetWorker Module license is required per application
type, per physical host for all virtualization technologies, including VMware ESX
Server, IBM LPAR, and Solaris Domains.
For example, an ESX server hosting three (3) Exchange servers requires only a single
NMM license. An ESX server hosting three (3) Exchange servers and a SharePoint
server would require two NMM licenses; one license for the three Exchange servers
and one license for the SharePoint server.
NetWorker VMware Protection licensing
For the NetWorker VMware Protection solution, using the EMC Backup and Recovery
appliance with the traditional license requires a disk backup enabler, since this solution
uses a single AFTD for NetWorker registration with the EMC Backup and Recovery
appliance.
The NetWorker Licensing Guide provides more information on the disk backup enabler.
VADP licensing
For VADP backups of a VMware environment, one Virtual Edition Client license is required
per VADP proxy host, regardless of the number of VMs and ESX servers configured to
perform backups by using the proxy backup host.
Using existing licenses to support VADP after upgrading
When upgrading to NetWorker 8.1 and later from a release previous to NetWorker 7.6
SP2, note that the VADP proxy is used instead of VCB. The existing license used by the
VCB proxy will automatically be migrated to support the VADP proxy.
NetWorker VMware Protection licensing
193
Licensing
194
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
GLOSSARY
This glossary contains terms related to disk storage subsystems. Many of these terms are
used in this manual.
B
backup
Backup proxy
An operation that saves data to a volume.
The system designated as the off-host backup system. This is a host with NetWorker client
package installed and the VADP software.
C
changed block tracking
A VMkernel feature that keeps track of the storage blocks of virtual machines as they
change over time. The VMkernel keeps track of block changes on virtual machines, which
enhances the backup process for applications that have been developed to take
advantage of VMware’s vStorage APIs.
checkpoint
A system-wide backup, taken only after 24 hours (and at the time of the checkpoint after
that first 24 hours have elapsed), that is initiated within the vSphere Web Client and
captures a point in time snapshot of the EMC Backup and Recovery appliance for disaster
recovery purposes.
client
A computer, workstation, or fileserver whose data can be backed up or recovered.
client file index
A database that tracks every database object, file, or file system that is backed up. The
NetWorker server maintains a single client index file for each client.
Console Server
NetWorker servers and clients are managed from the NetWorker Console server. The
Console server also provides reporting and monitoring capabilities for all NetWorker
servers and clients.
D
datastore
A virtual representation of a combination of underlying physical storage resources in the
datacenter. A datastore is the storage location (for example, a physical disk, a RAID, or a
SAN) for virtual machine files.
E
EMC Backup and
Recovery Appliance
The EMC Backup and Recovery appliance (or VMware Backup Appliance) is an appliance
that, when deployed, enables VMware backup and clone policy creation in NMC, and
enables the EMC Backup and Recovery plug-in in the vSphere Web Client to assign VMs to
those policies.
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
195
Glossary
EMC Data Protection
Restore Client
A browser that allows for file-level restores, where specific folders and files are restored to
the original virtual machine on Windows and Linux virtual machines.
F
file index
file-level restore (FLR)
See client file index
Allows local administrators of protected virtual machines to browse and mount backups
for the local machine. From these mounted backups, the administrator can then restore
individual files. FLR is accomplished using the EMC Data Protection Restore Client. See
“Using File Level Restore” on page 63 for additional information on FLR.
G
Guest OS
An operating system that runs on a virtual machine.
H
hotadd
A transport mode where the backup related I/O happens internally through the ESX I/O
stack using SCSI hot-add technology. This provides better backup I/O rates than NBD/
NBDSSL.
I
image level backup and
recovery
inactivity timeout
Used in the case of a disaster recovery.
The number of minutes to wait before a client is considered to be unavailable for backup.
J
JAR (Java Archive)
A file that contains compressed components needed for a Java applet or application.
L
label
A NetWorker assigned label that uniquely identifies a volume. Templates can be used to
define label parameters.
M
managed application
media database
196
A program that can be monitored and/or administered from the Console server.
Indexed entries about the location and the life cycle status of all data and volumes that the
NetWorker server manages.
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
Glossary
metadata
VSS-defined information that is passed from the writer to the requestor. Metadata includes
the writer name, a list of VSS components to back up, a list of components to exclude from
the backup, and the methods to use for recovery. See writer and See VSS component
N
NBD
NBDSSL
NetWorker Administrator
NetWorker client
A transport mode over LAN that is typically slower than hotadd mode. In NBD mode, the
CPU, memory and I/O load gets directly placed on the ESX hosting the production VMs,
since the backup data has to move through the same ESX and reach the proxy over the
network. NBD mode can be used either for physical or virtual proxy, and also supports all
storage types.
A transport mode that is the same as NBD except that the data transferred over the
network is encrypted. Data transfer in NBDSSL mode can therefore be slower and use more
CPU due to the additional load on the VADP host from SLL encryption/decryption.
A default NetWorker server user group that can add, change, or delete NetWorker server
user groups.
See client
NetWorker Console server
See Console Server
NetWorker Management
Console
See Console Server
NetWorker server
NetWorker storage node
The host running the NetWorker server software, which contains the online indexes and
provides backup and recovery services to the clients on the same network. See online
indexes
See storage node
O
online indexes
Databases on the NetWorker server that contain information about client backups and
backup volumes. See client file index See media database
R
recover
To restore files from a backup volume to a client disk.
S
SAN (storage area
network)
save
A transport mode that, when used, completely offloads the backup related CPU, memory or
I/O load on the virtual infrastructure. The backup I/O is fully offloaded to the storage layer
where the data is read directly from the SAN or iSCSI LUN. SAN mode requires a physical
proxy.
The command that backs up client files and makes entries in the online index.
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
197
Glossary
save set
single step backup and
recovery
storage node
A group of files or a file system that is backed up on storage media.
See image level backup and recovery
A storage device physically attached to another computer whose backup operations are
controlled by the NetWorker server.
U
update enabler
A code that updates software from a previous release. Like other temporary enabler codes,
it expires after 45 days.
V
VADP
vCenter
Virtual machine
VM
An infrastructure management tool that provides a central point for configuring,
provisioning, and managing virtualized IT environments, and is part of the VMware Virtual
Infrastructure package.
Software that creates a virtualized environment between the computer platform and its
operating system, so that the end user can install and operate software on an abstract
machine.
An acronym for virtual machine.
VMDK
Virtual Machine Disk (VMDK) is a file or set of files that appears as a physical disk drive to
a guest operating system. These files can be on the host machine or on a remote file
system. These files are commonly called VMDK files because of the .vmdk extension that
VMware adds to these files.
VMWare Backup
Appliance)
The VMware Backup Appliance (or EMC Backup and Recovery appliance) is an appliance
that, when deployed, enables VMware backup and clone policy creation in NMC, and
enables the EMC Backup and Recovery plug-in in the vSphere Web Client to assign VMs to
those policies.
VMware Tools
VSS (Volume Shadow
Copy Service)
VSS component
198
An acronym for vStorage APIs for Data Protection. VADP enables backup software to
perform centralized virtual machine backups without the disruption and overhead of
running backup tasks from inside each virtual machineVADP supersedes the VCB
framework for VMware backups.
Installed inside each virtual machine, VMware Tools enhance virtual machine performance
and add additional backup-related functionality.
Microsoft technology that creates a point-in-time snapshot of a disk volume. NetWorker
software backs up data from the snapshot. This allows applications to continue to write
data during the backup operation, and ensures that open files are not omitted
A subordinate unit of a writer. See writer
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
Glossary
W
writer
A database, system service, or application code that works with VSS to provide metadata
about what to back up and how to handle VSS components and applications during
backup and restore. See metadata and See VSS component
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
199
Glossary
200
EMC NetWorker 8.2 SP1 and later VMware Integration Guide
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising